bfd/
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
367@ifset I960
368@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
369@kindex -A @var{arch}
370@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
371@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
372@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
373In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
374Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
375@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
376the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 377archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
378family}, for details.
379
ff5dcc92 380Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
381other architecture families.
382@end ifset
383
384@ifclear SingleFormat
385@cindex binary input format
386@kindex -b @var{format}
387@kindex --format=@var{format}
388@cindex input format
389@cindex input format
390@item -b @var{input-format}
391@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
392@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
393file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 394@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 395that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 396configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 397to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
398default input format the most usual format on each machine.
399@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
400supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
401formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
402@xref{BFD}.
403
404You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
405binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
406linking object files of different formats), by including
407@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 408particular format.
252b5132
RH
409
410The default format is taken from the environment variable
411@code{GNUTARGET}.
412@ifset UsesEnvVars
413@xref{Environment}.
414@end ifset
415You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
416@code{TARGET};
417@ifclear man
418see @ref{Format Commands}.
419@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
420@end ifclear
421
422@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
423@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
424@cindex compatibility, MRI
425@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
426@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 427For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 428files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
429@ifclear man
430@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
431@end ifclear
432@ifset man
433the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
434@end ifset
435Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 436the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
437scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
438If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
439specified by any @samp{-L} options.
440
441@cindex common allocation
442@kindex -d
443@kindex -dc
444@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 445@item -d
252b5132
RH
446@itemx -dc
447@itemx -dp
448These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
449compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
450even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
451script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
452@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
453
454@cindex entry point, from command line
455@kindex -e @var{entry}
456@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 457@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
458@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
459Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
460program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
461named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
462and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
463base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
464@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
465and other ways of specifying the entry point.
466
b58f81ae
DJ
467@kindex --exclude-libs
468@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
469Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 470exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
471@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
472automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
473port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
474explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
475option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
476be treated as hidden.
477
e1c37eb5
DK
478@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
479@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
480Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
481should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
482into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
483may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
484used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
485the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
486match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
487command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
488of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
489regardless of this option.
490
252b5132
RH
491@cindex dynamic symbol table
492@kindex -E
493@kindex --export-dynamic
494@item -E
495@itemx --export-dynamic
496When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
497dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
498which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
499
500If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
501contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
502mentioned in the link.
503
504If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
505back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
506dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
507linking the program itself.
508
55255dae 509You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 510be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 511See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 512
8b747e1a
DK
513Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
514support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
515the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
516
36f63dca 517@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
518@cindex big-endian objects
519@cindex endianness
520@kindex -EB
521@item -EB
522Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
523
524@cindex little-endian objects
525@kindex -EL
526@item -EL
527Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 528@end ifclear
252b5132 529
2509a395
SL
530@kindex -f @var{name}
531@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
532@item -f @var{name}
533@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
534When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
535to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
536table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
537symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
538
539If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
540run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
541the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
542first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
543@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
544in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
545Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
546implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
547machine specific performance.
548
549This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
550will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
551
2509a395
SL
552@kindex -F @var{name}
553@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 554@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 555@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
556When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
557the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
558of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
559on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
560
561If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
562run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
563dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
564filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
565found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
566used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
567@var{name}.
568
ff5dcc92 569Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 570toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
571object files.
572@ifclear SingleFormat
573The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 574@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 575@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
576environment variable.
577@end ifclear
578The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
579creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 580
3dbf70a2 581@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
582@kindex -fini=@var{name}
583@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
584When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
585executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
586address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
587the function to call.
588
252b5132
RH
589@kindex -g
590@item -g
591Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
592
2509a395
SL
593@kindex -G @var{value}
594@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 595@cindex object size
2509a395 596@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
597@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
598Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
599@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
600MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
601sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
602
603@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 604@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 605@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 606@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
607@itemx -soname=@var{name}
608When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
609the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
610which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
611linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
612field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
613
614@kindex -i
615@cindex incremental link
616@item -i
617Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
618
3dbf70a2 619@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -init=@var{name}
621@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
622When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
623executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
624of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
625function to call.
626
252b5132 627@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 628@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 629@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 630@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
631@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
632Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
633list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
634If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
635will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
636will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 637
ff5dcc92 638On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
639files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
640and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
641called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
642@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
643indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
644to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
645@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
646
647The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
648specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
649was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
650command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
651archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
652the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
653
ff5dcc92 654See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
655archives multiple times.
656
657You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
658
659@ifset GENERIC
660This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 661if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
662behaviour of the AIX linker.
663@end ifset
664
665@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 666@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 667@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 668@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 669@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
670Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
671for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
672option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
673in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
674on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 675@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
676order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
677how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
678option is specified.
252b5132 679
9c8ebd6a
DJ
680If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
681by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
682
252b5132
RH
683@ifset UsesEnvVars
684The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 685@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
686some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
687@end ifset
688
689The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
690@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
691at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
692
693@cindex emulation
694@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 695@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
696Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
697emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
698
699If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
700@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
701
702Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
703configured.
704
705@cindex link map
706@kindex -M
707@kindex --print-map
708@item -M
709@itemx --print-map
710Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
711information about the link, including the following:
712
713@itemize @bullet
714@item
3b83e13a 715Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
716@item
717How common symbols are allocated.
718@item
719All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
720which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
721@item
722The values assigned to symbols.
723
724Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
725involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
726have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
727linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
728of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
729the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
730linker script containing:
731
732@smallexample
733 foo = 1
734 foo = foo * 4
735 foo = foo + 8
736@end smallexample
737
738will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
739option is used:
740
741@smallexample
742 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
743 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
744 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
745@end smallexample
746
747See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
748scripts.
252b5132
RH
749@end itemize
750
751@kindex -n
752@cindex read-only text
753@cindex NMAGIC
754@kindex --nmagic
755@item -n
756@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 757Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 758@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
759
760@kindex -N
761@kindex --omagic
762@cindex read/write from cmd line
763@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 764@item -N
252b5132
RH
765@itemx --omagic
766Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
767not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
768libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
769mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
770is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
771specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
772
773@kindex --no-omagic
774@cindex OMAGIC
775@item --no-omagic
776This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
777sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
778be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
779shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
780
781@kindex -o @var{output}
782@kindex --output=@var{output}
783@cindex naming the output file
784@item -o @var{output}
785@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 786Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
787option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
788script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
789
790@kindex -O @var{level}
791@cindex generating optimized output
792@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 793If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 794the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
795should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
796option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
797the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
798no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
799of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 800
a712da20
NC
801@kindex -q
802@kindex --emit-relocs
803@cindex retain relocations in final executable
804@item -q
805@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 806Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
807Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
808order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
809in larger executables.
810
dbab7a7b
NC
811This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
812
4f471f39
RS
813@kindex --force-dynamic
814@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
815@item --force-dynamic
816Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
817to VxWorks targets.
818
252b5132
RH
819@cindex partial link
820@cindex relocatable output
821@kindex -r
1049f94e 822@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 823@item -r
1049f94e 824@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 825Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 826turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
827linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
828magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
829@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 830@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
831If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
832linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
833constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
834
62bf86b4
HPN
835When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
836partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
837relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
838example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
839with input files in other formats at all.
840
252b5132
RH
841This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
842
843@kindex -R @var{file}
844@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
845@cindex symbol-only input
846@item -R @var{filename}
847@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
848Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
849relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
850to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
851programs. You may use this option more than once.
852
ff5dcc92 853For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 854followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 855the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
856
857@kindex -s
858@kindex --strip-all
859@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 860@item -s
252b5132
RH
861@itemx --strip-all
862Omit all symbol information from the output file.
863
864@kindex -S
865@kindex --strip-debug
866@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 867@item -S
252b5132
RH
868@itemx --strip-debug
869Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
870
871@kindex -t
872@kindex --trace
873@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 874@item -t
252b5132 875@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 876Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
877
878@kindex -T @var{script}
879@kindex --script=@var{script}
880@cindex script files
881@item -T @var{scriptfile}
882@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
883Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 884@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 885@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
886output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
887the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
888specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
889options accumulate.
252b5132 890
14be8564
L
891@kindex -dT @var{script}
892@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
893@cindex script files
894@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
895@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
896Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
897
898This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
899processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
900command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
901@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
902behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
903command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
904the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
905@samp{gcc}).
906
252b5132
RH
907@kindex -u @var{symbol}
908@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
909@cindex undefined symbol
910@item -u @var{symbol}
911@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
912Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
913symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
914modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
915different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
916option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
917
918@kindex -Ur
919@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 920@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
921For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
922@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 923turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
924@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
925It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
926with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
927be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
928@samp{-r} for the others.
929
577a0623
AM
930@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
931@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
932Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
933@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
934missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
935specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
936multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
937input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
938in a linker script.
a854a4a7 939
252b5132
RH
940@kindex -v
941@kindex -V
942@kindex --version
943@cindex version
944@item -v
945@itemx --version
946@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 947Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
948lists the supported emulations.
949
950@kindex -x
951@kindex --discard-all
952@cindex deleting local symbols
953@item -x
954@itemx --discard-all
955Delete all local symbols.
956
957@kindex -X
958@kindex --discard-locals
959@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 960@item -X
252b5132 961@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
962Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
963system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
964or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
965
966@kindex -y @var{symbol}
967@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
968@cindex symbol tracing
969@item -y @var{symbol}
970@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
971Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
972option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
973to prepend an underscore.
974
975This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
976don't know where the reference is coming from.
977
978@kindex -Y @var{path}
979@item -Y @var{path}
980Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
981for Solaris compatibility.
982
983@kindex -z @var{keyword}
984@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
985The recognized keywords are:
986@table @samp
987
988@item combreloc
989Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
990lookup caching possible.
991
992@item defs
560e09e9 993Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 994shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 995
6aa29e7b
JJ
996@item execstack
997Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
998
cd6d6c15
NC
999@item initfirst
1000This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1001It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1002before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1003the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1004the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1005objects.
1006
1007@item interpose
1008Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1009but the primary executable.
1010
5fa222e4
AM
1011@item lazy
1012When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1013dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1014the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1015Lazy binding is the default.
1016
cd6d6c15
NC
1017@item loadfltr
1018Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1019runtime.
1020
1021@item muldefs
1022Allows multiple definitions.
1023
1024@item nocombreloc
1025Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1026
1027@item nocopyreloc
1028Disables production of copy relocs.
1029
1030@item nodefaultlib
1031Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1032ignore any default library search paths.
1033
1034@item nodelete
1035Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1036
1037@item nodlopen
1038Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1039
1040@item nodump
1041Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1042
6aa29e7b
JJ
1043@item noexecstack
1044Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1045
1046@item norelro
1047Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1048
cd6d6c15
NC
1049@item now
1050When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1051dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1052when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1053deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1054first called.
1055
1056@item origin
1057Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1058
6aa29e7b
JJ
1059@item relro
1060Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1061
24718e3b
L
1062@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1063Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1064
1065@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1066Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1067
cd6d6c15
NC
1068@end table
1069
ece2d90e 1070Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1071
1072@kindex -(
1073@cindex groups of archives
1074@item -( @var{archives} -)
1075@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1076The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1077either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1078
1079The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1080references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1081the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1082archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1083object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1084would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1085they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1086resolved.
1087
1088Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1089it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1090more archives.
1091
69da35b5
NC
1092@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1093@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1094@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1095@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1096Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1097recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1098and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1099the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1100behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1101so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1102restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1103
4a43e768
AM
1104@kindex --as-needed
1105@kindex --no-as-needed
1106@item --as-needed
1107@itemx --no-as-needed
1108This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1109on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1110the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1111on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
010e5ae2
AM
1112needed. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted
1113for a library that satisfies a symbol reference from regular objects
1114which is undefined at the point that the library was linked, or, if
1115the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
1116linked up to that point, a reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1117@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1118
e56f61be
L
1119@kindex --add-needed
1120@kindex --no-add-needed
1121@item --add-needed
1122@itemx --no-add-needed
1123This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1124DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1125the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1126a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1127@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1128for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1129the default behaviour.
1130
252b5132
RH
1131@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1132@item -assert @var{keyword}
1133This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1134
1135@kindex -Bdynamic
1136@kindex -dy
1137@kindex -call_shared
1138@item -Bdynamic
1139@itemx -dy
1140@itemx -call_shared
1141Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1142for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1143default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1144for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1145multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1146@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1147
a1ab1d2a
UD
1148@kindex -Bgroup
1149@item -Bgroup
1150Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1151section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1152object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1153@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1154only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -Bstatic
1157@kindex -dn
1158@kindex -non_shared
1159@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1160@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1161@itemx -dn
1162@itemx -non_shared
1163@itemx -static
1164Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1165platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1166variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1167may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1168library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1169option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1170option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1171shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1172references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1173libraries.
252b5132
RH
1174
1175@kindex -Bsymbolic
1176@item -Bsymbolic
1177When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1178definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1179for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1180within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1181platforms which support shared libraries.
1182
40b36307
L
1183@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1184@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1185When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1186symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1187This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1188libraries.
1189
55255dae
L
1190@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1191@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1192Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1193typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1194global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1195within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1196to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1197in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1198which support shared libraries.
1199
1200The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1201scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1202
40b36307
L
1203@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1204@item --dynamic-list-data
1205Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1206
1207@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1208@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1209Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1210is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1211
0b8a70d9
L
1212@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1213@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1214Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1215
252b5132
RH
1216@kindex --check-sections
1217@kindex --no-check-sections
1218@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1219@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1220Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1221been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1222perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1223suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1224allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1225restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1226Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1227force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1228option.
252b5132
RH
1229
1230@cindex cross reference table
1231@kindex --cref
1232@item --cref
1233Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1234generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1235Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1236
1237The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1238easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1239sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1240symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1241definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1242
4818e05f
AM
1243@cindex common allocation
1244@kindex --no-define-common
1245@item --no-define-common
1246This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1247The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1248@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1249
1250The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1251the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1252of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1253forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1254Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1255from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1256This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1257and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1258duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1259paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1260
252b5132 1261@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1262@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1263@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1264Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1265address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1266times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1267limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1268context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1269symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1270constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1271using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1272Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1273space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1274@var{expression}.
1275
1276@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1277@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1278@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1279@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1280@itemx --no-demangle
1281These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1282and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1283present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1284underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1285mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1286different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1287to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1288demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1289is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1290
1291@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1292@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1293@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1294@item -I@var{file}
1295@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1296Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1297generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1298linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1299doing.
1300
7ce691ae 1301@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1302@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1303@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1304@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1305Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1306with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1307
252b5132
RH
1308@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1309@item --force-exe-suffix
1310Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1311
1312If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1313@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1314the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1315option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1316Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1317it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1318
1319@kindex --gc-sections
1320@kindex --no-gc-sections
1321@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1322@item --gc-sections
1323@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1324Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1325targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1326performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1327@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1328
d5465ba2
AM
1329@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1330examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1331symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1332command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1333referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1334libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1335referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1336the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1337relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1338
ac69cbc6
TG
1339This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1340@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1341specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1342a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1343
c17d87de
NC
1344@kindex --print-gc-sections
1345@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1346@cindex garbage collection
1347@item --print-gc-sections
1348@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1349List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1350printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1351collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1352default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1353be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1354line.
1355
252b5132
RH
1356@cindex help
1357@cindex usage
1358@kindex --help
1359@item --help
1360Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1361
ea20a7da
CC
1362@kindex --target-help
1363@item --target-help
1364Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1365
2509a395
SL
1366@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1367@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1368Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1369@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1370
1371@cindex memory usage
1372@kindex --no-keep-memory
1373@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1374@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1375symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1376instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1377necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1378while linking a large executable.
1379
1380@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1381@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1382@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1383@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1384Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1385is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1386The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1387behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1388libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1389
aa713662
L
1390@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1391@kindex -z muldefs
1392@item --allow-multiple-definition
1393@itemx -z muldefs
1394Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1395report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1396first definition will be used.
1397
b79e8c78 1398@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1399@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1400@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1401@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1402Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1403This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1404determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1405shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1406how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1407
903249d7
NC
1408The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1409referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1410an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1411a shared library.
1412
1413The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1414libraries specified at link time are that:
1415
1416@itemize @bullet
1417@item
1418A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1419that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1420resolvable at load time.
1421@item
1422There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1423symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1424
1425The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1426select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1427architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1428appropriate memset function.
1429@end itemize
b79e8c78 1430
31941635
L
1431@kindex --no-undefined-version
1432@item --no-undefined-version
1433Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1434it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1435will be issued instead.
1436
3e3b46e5
PB
1437@kindex --default-symver
1438@item --default-symver
1439Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1440exported symbols.
1441
1442@kindex --default-imported-symver
1443@item --default-imported-symver
1444Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1445imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1446
252b5132
RH
1447@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1448@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1449Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1450files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1451been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1452This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1453errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1454have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1455inappropriate.
1456
fe7929ce
AM
1457@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1458@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1459Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1460library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1461
252b5132
RH
1462@kindex --no-whole-archive
1463@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1464Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1465archive files.
1466
1467@cindex output file after errors
1468@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1469@item --noinhibit-exec
1470Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1471Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1472errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1473when it issues any error whatsoever.
1474
0a9c1c8e
CD
1475@kindex -nostdlib
1476@item -nostdlib
1477Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1478command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1479(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1480
252b5132 1481@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1482@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1483@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1484@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1485file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1486@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1487object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1488object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1489should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1490usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1491name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1492list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1493command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1494this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1495@end ifclear
1496
36af4a4e
JJ
1497@kindex -pie
1498@kindex --pic-executable
1499@item -pie
1500@itemx --pic-executable
1501@cindex position independent executables
1502Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1503ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1504libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1505address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1506normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1507defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex -qmagic
1510@item -qmagic
1511This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1512
1513@kindex -Qy
1514@item -Qy
1515This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1516
1517@kindex --relax
1518@cindex synthesizing linker
1519@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1520@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1521An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1522@ifset GENERIC
1523This option is only supported on a few targets.
1524@end ifset
1525@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1526@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1527@end ifset
1528@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1529@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1530@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1531@ifset XTENSA
1532@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1533@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1534@ifset M68HC11
1535@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1536@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1537@ifset POWERPC
1538@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1539@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1540
1541On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1542optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1543in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1544instructions in the output object file.
1545
1546On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1547debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1548@ifset GENERIC
1549This is known to be
1550the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1551@end ifset
1552
1553@ifset GENERIC
1554On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1555but ignored.
1556@end ifset
1557
1558@cindex retaining specified symbols
1559@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1560@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1561@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1562@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1563Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1564discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1565symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1566@ifset GENERIC
1567(such as VxWorks)
1568@end ifset
1569where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1570run-time memory.
1571
1572@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1573or symbols needed for relocations.
1574
1575You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1576line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1577
1578@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1579@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1580@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1581@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1582Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1583linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1584arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1585them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1586also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1587objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1588@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1589ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1590@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1591
ff5dcc92 1592The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1593SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1594@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1595runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1596options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1597gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1598file systems.
252b5132 1599
ff5dcc92 1600For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1601followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1602the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1603@end ifset
1604
1605@ifset GENERIC
1606@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1607@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1608@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1609When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1610happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1611of the input files.
1612
1613When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1614non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1615shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1616explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1617specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1618@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1619either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1620appearing multiple times.
1621
28c309a2
NC
1622This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1623that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1624is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1625runtime linker would do.
1626
252b5132 1627The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1628libraries:
252b5132
RH
1629@enumerate
1630@item
ff5dcc92 1631Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1632@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1633Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1634between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1635specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1636used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1637at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1638by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1639the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1640@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1641On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1642@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1643environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1644@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1645On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1646directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1647@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1648For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1649variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1650@item
ec4eb78a
L
1651For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1652@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1653libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1654@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1655@item
252b5132
RH
1656The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1657@item
1658For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1659exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1660@end enumerate
1661
1662If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1663warning and continue with the link.
1664@end ifset
1665
1666@kindex -shared
1667@kindex -Bshareable
1668@item -shared
1669@itemx -Bshareable
1670@cindex shared libraries
1671Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1672and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1673shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1674undefined symbols in the link.
1675
252b5132 1676@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1677@item --sort-common
1678@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1679@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1680This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1681ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1682sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1683eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1684between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1685specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1686
2509a395
SL
1687@kindex --sort-section=name
1688@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1689This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1690patterns in the linker script.
1691
2509a395
SL
1692@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1693@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1694This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1695patterns in the linker script.
1696
252b5132 1697@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1698@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1699Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1700each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1701size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1702
1703@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1704@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1705Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1706output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1707This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1708certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1709cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1710that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1711support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1712input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1713more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1714many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1715
1716@kindex --stats
1717@item --stats
1718Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1719as execution time and memory usage.
1720
2509a395 1721@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1722@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1723Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1724configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1725that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1726
252b5132
RH
1727@kindex --traditional-format
1728@cindex traditional format
1729@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1730For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1731the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1732use the traditional format instead.
1733
1734@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1735For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1736symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1737full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1738@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1739trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1740combine duplicate entries.
1741
2509a395
SL
1742@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1743@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1744Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1745address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1746times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1747line.
1748@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1749for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1750@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1751should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1752sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1753
2509a395
SL
1754@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1755@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1756@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1757@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1758@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1759@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1760@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1761Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1762@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1763
2509a395
SL
1764@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1765@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1766@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1767When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1768of the first byte of the text segment.
1769
560e09e9
NC
1770@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1771@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1772Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1773values for @samp{method}:
1774
1775@table @samp
1776@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1777Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1778
1779@item report-all
da8bce14 1780Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1781
1782@item ignore-in-object-files
1783Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1784ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1785
1786@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1787Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1788ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1789when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1790libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1791command line.
1792@end table
1793
1794The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1795by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1796
1797Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1798unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1799can change this to a warning.
1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --verbose
1802@cindex verbose
1803@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1804@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1805Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1806supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1807the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1808
1809@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1810@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1811@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1812Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1813used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1814about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1815is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1816@xref{VERSION}.
1817
7ce691ae 1818@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1819@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1820@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1821@item --warn-common
1822Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1823a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1824but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1825you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1826Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1827warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1828
1829There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1830
1831@table @samp
1832@item int i = 1;
1833A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1834file.
1835
1836@item extern int i;
1837An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1838There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1839variable somewhere.
1840
1841@item int i;
1842A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1843variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1844The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1845single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1846size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1847a definition of the same variable.
1848@end table
1849
1850The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1851Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1852just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1853encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1854a common symbol.
1855
1856@enumerate
1857@item
1858Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1859definition for the symbol.
1860@smallexample
1861@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1862 overridden by definition
1863@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1864@end smallexample
1865
1866@item
1867Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1868the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1869except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1870@smallexample
1871@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1872 overriding common
1873@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1874@end smallexample
1875
1876@item
1877Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1878@smallexample
1879@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1880 of `@var{symbol}'
1881@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1882@end smallexample
1883
1884@item
1885Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1886@smallexample
1887@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1888 overridden by larger common
1889@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1890@end smallexample
1891
1892@item
1893Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1894the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1895encountered in a different order.
1896@smallexample
1897@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1898 overriding smaller common
1899@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1900@end smallexample
1901@end enumerate
1902
1903@kindex --warn-constructors
1904@item --warn-constructors
1905Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1906object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1907detect the use of global constructors.
1908
1909@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1910@item --warn-multiple-gp
1911Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1912This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1913Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1914section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1915of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1916base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1917base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1918bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1919large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1920values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1921option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1922
1923@kindex --warn-once
1924@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1925@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1926@item --warn-once
1927Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1928which refers to it.
1929
1930@kindex --warn-section-align
1931@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1932@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1933@item --warn-section-align
1934Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1935alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1936The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1937is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1938the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1939
8fdd7217
NC
1940@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1941@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1942Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1943
a0c402a5
L
1944@kindex --warn-alternate-em
1945@item --warn-alternate-em
1946Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1947
560e09e9
NC
1948@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1949@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1950If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1951@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1952This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1953
1954@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1955@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1956This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1957it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1958
252b5132
RH
1959@kindex --whole-archive
1960@cindex including an entire archive
1961@item --whole-archive
1962For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1963@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1964in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1965files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1966library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1967library. This option may be used more than once.
1968
7ec229ce 1969Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1970about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1971Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1972list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1973your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1974
2509a395
SL
1975@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
1976@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
1977Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1978@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1979undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1980@var{symbol}.
1981
1982This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1983wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1984wishes to call the system function, it should call
1985@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1986
1987Here is a trivial example:
1988
1989@smallexample
1990void *
cc2f008e 1991__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1992@{
cc2f008e 1993 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1994 return __real_malloc (c);
1995@}
1996@end smallexample
1997
ff5dcc92 1998If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1999all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2000instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2001call the real @code{malloc} function.
2002
2003You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2004links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2005you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2006file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2007call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2008
6aa29e7b
JJ
2009@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2010@item --eh-frame-hdr
2011Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2012@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2013
6c1439be
L
2014@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2015@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2016@item --enable-new-dtags
2017@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2018This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2019systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2020@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2021If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2022created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2023those options are only available for ELF systems.
2024
2d643429 2025@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2026@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2027Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2028close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2029time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2030increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2031value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2032
fdc90cb4
JJ
2033@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2034@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2035Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2036@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2037new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2038the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2039hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2040
35835446
JR
2041@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2042@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2043This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2044linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2045for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2046about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2047
4f9c04f7 2048Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20491021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2050run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2051has been used.
2052
2053The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2054enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2055
c0065db7
RM
2056@kindex --build-id
2057@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2058@item --build-id
2059@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2060Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2061The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2062file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2063@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2064parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2065@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2066@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2067an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2068characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2069omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2070
2071The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2072that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2073unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2074to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2075file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2076string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2077
2078Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2079@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2080@end table
2081
0285c67d
NC
2082@c man end
2083
36f63dca 2084@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2085
0285c67d
NC
2086@c man begin OPTIONS
2087
ff5dcc92 2088The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2089the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2090normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2091use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2092@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2093like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2094symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2095object file).
2096
2097In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2098support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2099PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2100values by either a space or an equals sign.
2101
ff5dcc92 2102@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2103
2104@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2105@item --add-stdcall-alias
2106If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2107as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2108[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2109
2110@kindex --base-file
2111@item --base-file @var{file}
2112Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2113addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2114@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2115[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2116
2117@kindex --dll
2118@item --dll
2119Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2120@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2121file.
bb10df36 2122[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2123
88183869
DK
2124@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2125@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2126@item --enable-long-section-names
2127@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2128The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2129the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2130for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2131fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2132to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2133allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2134disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2135generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2136as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2137with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2138GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2139information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2140option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2141section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2142when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2143image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2144[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2145
252b5132
RH
2146@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2147@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2148@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2149@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2150If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2151do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2152only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2153resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2154undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2155@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2156to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2157warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2158import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2159to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2160feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2161@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2162mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2163[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2164
2165@cindex DLLs, creating
2166@kindex --export-all-symbols
2167@item --export-all-symbols
2168If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2169be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2170otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2171explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2172attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2173option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2174@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2175@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2176exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2177re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2178such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2179@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2180@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2181Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2182not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2183extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2184(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2185These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2186@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2187@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2188@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2189@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2190[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2191
2192@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2193@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2194Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2195exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2196[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2197
2198@kindex --file-alignment
2199@item --file-alignment
2200Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2201file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2202512.
bb10df36 2203[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2204
2205@cindex heap size
2206@kindex --heap
2207@item --heap @var{reserve}
2208@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2209Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2210to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2211committed.
bb10df36 2212[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2213
2214@cindex image base
2215@kindex --image-base
2216@item --image-base @var{value}
2217Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2218the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2219is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2220your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2221other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2222for dlls.
bb10df36 2223[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2224
2225@kindex --kill-at
2226@item --kill-at
2227If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2228symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2229[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2230
26d2d8a2
BF
2231@kindex --large-address-aware
2232@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2233If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2234header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2235greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2236or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2237section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2238[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2239
252b5132
RH
2240@kindex --major-image-version
2241@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2242Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2243[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2244
2245@kindex --major-os-version
2246@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2247Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2248[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2249
2250@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2251@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2252Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2253[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2254
2255@kindex --minor-image-version
2256@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2257Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2258[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2259
2260@kindex --minor-os-version
2261@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2262Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2263[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2264
2265@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2266@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2267Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2268[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2269
2270@cindex DEF files, creating
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --output-def
2273@item --output-def @var{file}
2274The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2275file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2276(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2277library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2278automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2279[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2280
b044cda1
CW
2281@cindex DLLs, creating
2282@kindex --out-implib
2283@item --out-implib @var{file}
2284The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2285import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2286import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2287may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2288makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2289creation step.
bb10df36 2290[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2291
2292@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2293@item --enable-auto-image-base
2294Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2295using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2296from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2297collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2298avoided.
bb10df36 2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2300
2301@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2302@item --disable-auto-image-base
2303Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2304user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2305default.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2307
2308@cindex DLLs, linking to
2309@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2310@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2311When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2312search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2313@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2314between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2315uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2316@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2317[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2318
2319@kindex --enable-auto-import
2320@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2321Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2322DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2323building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2324'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2325to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2326specification published by Microsoft.
2327
e2a83dd0
NC
2328Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2329data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2330placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2331around a problem with consts that is described here:
2332http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2333
4d8907ac
DS
2334Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2335see this message:
0d888aac 2336
ece2d90e 2337"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2338documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2339
ece2d90e
NC
2340This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2341ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2342allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2343fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2344constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2345multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2346this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2347of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2348the warning, and exit.
2349
2350There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2351data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2352
2fa9fc65
NC
2353One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2354of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2355this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2356
c0065db7
RM
2357A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2358that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2359there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2360a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2361
2362@example
2363extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2364extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2365 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2366@end example
2367
2368or
2369
2370@example
2371extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2372extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2373 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2374@end example
2375
c0065db7 2376For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2377is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2378
2379@example
2380extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2381extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2382 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2383@end example
2384
c406afaf
NC
2385or
2386
2387@example
2388extern long long extern_ll;
2389extern_ll -->
2390 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2391@end example
2392
2fa9fc65 2393A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2394'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2395@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2396requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2397building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2398merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2399between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2400constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2401
2402Original:
2403@example
2404--foo.h
2405extern int arr[];
2406--foo.c
2407#include "foo.h"
2408void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2409 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2410@}
2411@end example
2412
2413Solution 1:
2414@example
2415--foo.h
2416extern int arr[];
2417--foo.c
2418#include "foo.h"
2419void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2420 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2421 volatile int *parr = arr;
2422 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2423@}
2424@end example
2425
2426Solution 2:
2427@example
2428--foo.h
2429/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2430#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2431 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2432#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2433#else
2434#define FOO_IMPORT
2435#endif
2436extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2437--foo.c
2438#include "foo.h"
2439void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2440 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2441@}
2442@end example
2443
c0065db7 2444A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2445library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2446for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2447functions).
bb10df36 2448[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2449
2450@kindex --disable-auto-import
2451@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2452Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2453@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2454[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2455
2fa9fc65
NC
2456@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2457@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2458If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2459that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2460a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2461environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2462[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2463
2464@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2465@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2466Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2467DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2468[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2469
b044cda1
CW
2470@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2471@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2472Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2473[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2474
252b5132
RH
2475@kindex --section-alignment
2476@item --section-alignment
2477Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2478addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2479[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2480
2481@cindex stack size
2482@kindex --stack
2483@item --stack @var{reserve}
2484@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2485Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2486to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2487committed.
bb10df36 2488[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2489
2490@kindex --subsystem
2491@item --subsystem @var{which}
2492@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2493@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2494Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2495legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2496@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2497the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2498@var{which}.
bb10df36 2499[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2500
2f563b51
DK
2501The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2502of the PE file header:
2503[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2504
2505@kindex --dynamicbase
2506@item --dynamicbase
2507The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2508randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2509Vista for i386 PE targets.
2510
2511@kindex --forceinteg
2512@item --forceinteg
2513Code integrity checks are enforced.
2514
2515@kindex --nxcompat
2516@item --nxcompat
2517The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2518This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2519
2520@kindex --no-isolation
2521@item --no-isolation
2522Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2523
2524@kindex --no-seh
2525@item --no-seh
2526The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2527this image.
2528
2529@kindex --no-bind
2530@item --no-bind
2531Do not bind this image.
2532
2533@kindex --wdmdriver
2534@item --wdmdriver
2535The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2536
2537@kindex --tsaware
2538@item --tsaware
2539The image is Terminal Server aware.
2540
252b5132
RH
2541@end table
2542
0285c67d
NC
2543@c man end
2544
93fd0973
SC
2545@ifset M68HC11
2546@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2547
2548@c man begin OPTIONS
2549
2550The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2551memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2552
2553@table @gcctabopt
2554
2555@kindex --no-trampoline
2556@item --no-trampoline
2557This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2558is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2559instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2560
2561@kindex --bank-window
2562@item --bank-window @var{name}
2563This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2564the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2565The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2566paging and addresses within the memory window.
2567
2568@end table
2569
2570@c man end
2571@end ifset
2572
7fb9f789
NC
2573@ifset M68K
2574@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2575
2576@c man begin OPTIONS
2577
2578The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2579when linking for 68K targets.
2580
2581@table @gcctabopt
2582
2583@kindex --got
2584@item --got=@var{type}
2585This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2586@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2587@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2588Info entry for @file{ld}.
2589
2590@end table
2591
2592@c man end
2593@end ifset
2594
252b5132
RH
2595@ifset UsesEnvVars
2596@node Environment
2597@section Environment Variables
2598
0285c67d
NC
2599@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2600
560e09e9 2601You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2602@ifclear SingleFormat
2603@code{GNUTARGET},
2604@end ifclear
2605@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2606
36f63dca 2607@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2608@kindex GNUTARGET
2609@cindex default input format
2610@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2611use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2612of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2613@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2614of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2615attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2616this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2617there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2618object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2619BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2620in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2621@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2622
2623@kindex LDEMULATION
2624@cindex default emulation
2625@cindex emulation, default
2626@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2627@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2628behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2629available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2630the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2631variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2632linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2633
2634@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2635@cindex demangling, default
2636Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2637@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2638default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2639a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2640may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2641options.
2642
0285c67d
NC
2643@c man end
2644@end ifset
2645
252b5132
RH
2646@node Scripts
2647@chapter Linker Scripts
2648
2649@cindex scripts
2650@cindex linker scripts
2651@cindex command files
2652Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2653written in the linker command language.
2654
2655The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2656the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2657the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2658more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2659direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2660described below.
2661
2662The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2663yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2664linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2665to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2666such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2667
2668You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2669line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2670default linker script.
2671
2672You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2673to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2674Linker Scripts}.
2675
2676@menu
2677* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2678* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2679* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2680* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2681* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2682* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2683* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2684* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2685* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2686* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2687* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2688@end menu
2689
2690@node Basic Script Concepts
2691@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2692@cindex linker script concepts
2693We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2694describe the linker script language.
2695
2696The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2697file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2698@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2699The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2700purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2701among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2702section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2703in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2704
2705Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2706also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2707contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2708the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2709A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2710area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2711loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2712which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2713of debugging information.
2714
2715Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2716first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2717the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2718@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2719section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2720same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2721is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2722(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2723based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2724RAM address would be the VMA.
2725
2726You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2727program with the @samp{-h} option.
2728
2729Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2730@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2731has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2732information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2733will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2734static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2735referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2736
2737You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2738program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2739option.
2740
2741@node Script Format
2742@section Linker Script Format
2743@cindex linker script format
2744Linker scripts are text files.
2745
2746You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2747either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2748symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2749generally ignored.
2750
2751Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2752If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2753otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2754double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2755file name.
2756
2757You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2758@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2759to whitespace.
2760
2761@node Simple Example
2762@section Simple Linker Script Example
2763@cindex linker script example
2764@cindex example of linker script
2765Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2766
2767The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2768@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2769memory layout of the output file.
2770
2771The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2772describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2773code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2774@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2775Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2776your input files.
2777
2778For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
27790x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2780linker script which will do that:
2781@smallexample
2782SECTIONS
2783@{
2784 . = 0x10000;
2785 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2786 . = 0x8000000;
2787 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2788 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2789@}
2790@end smallexample
2791
2792You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2793followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2794descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2795
252b5132
RH
2796The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2797sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2798counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2799other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2800current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2801incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2802@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2803
2804The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2805required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2806after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2807which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2808wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2809means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2810
2811Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2812@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2813@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2814
2815The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2816the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2817at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2818output section, the value of the location counter will be
2819@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2820effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2821immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2822
2823The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2824alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2825example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2826sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2827may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2828sections.
2829
2830That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2831
2832@node Simple Commands
2833@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2834@cindex linker script simple commands
2835In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2836
2837@menu
2838* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2839* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2840@ifclear SingleFormat
2841* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2842@end ifclear
2843
4a93e180 2844* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2845* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2846@end menu
2847
2848@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2849@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2850@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2851@cindex start of execution
2852@cindex first instruction
2853@cindex entry point
2854The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2855point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2856entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2857@smallexample
2858ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2859@end smallexample
2860
2861There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2862entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2863stopping when one of them succeeds:
2864@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2865@item
252b5132 2866the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2867@item
252b5132 2868the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2869@item
252b5132 2870the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2871@item
252b5132 2872the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2873@item
252b5132
RH
2874The address @code{0}.
2875@end itemize
2876
2877@node File Commands
36f63dca 2878@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2879@cindex linker script file commands
2880Several linker script commands deal with files.
2881
2882@table @code
2883@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2884@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2885@cindex including a linker script
2886Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2887be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2888with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
288910 levels deep.
2890
4006703d
NS
2891You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2892@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2893
252b5132
RH
2894@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2895@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2896@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2897@cindex input files in linker scripts
2898@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2899@cindex linker script input object files
2900The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2901in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2902
2903For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2904a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2905then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2906
2907In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2908script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2909
e3f2db7f
AO
2910In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2911with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2912located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2913for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2914open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2915linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2916description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2917
ff5dcc92 2918If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2919name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2920@samp{-l}.
2921
2922When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2923files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2924script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2925
2926@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2927@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2928@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2929@cindex grouping input files
2930The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2931files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2932new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2933in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2934
b717d30e
JJ
2935@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2936@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2937@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2938This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2939commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2940as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2941with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2942when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2943@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2944and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2945setting afterwards.
2946
252b5132
RH
2947@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2948@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2949@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2950The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2951@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2952@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2953Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2954precedence.
2955
2956You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2957output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2958
2959@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2960@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2961@cindex library search path in linker script
2962@cindex archive search path in linker script
2963@cindex search path in linker script
2964The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2965@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2966@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2967on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2968are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2969the command line option are searched first.
2970
2971@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2972@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2973@cindex first input file
2974The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2975that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2976though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2977when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2978first file.
2979@end table
2980
2981@ifclear SingleFormat
2982@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2983@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2984A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2985
2986@table @code
2987@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2988@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2989@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2990@cindex output file format in linker script
2991The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2992output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2993exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2994(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2995line option takes precedence.
2996
2997You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2998formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2999This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3000desired endianness.
3001
3002If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3003will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3004output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3005used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3006
3007For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3008command:
3009@smallexample
3010OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3011@end smallexample
3012This says that the default format for the output file is
3013@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3014option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3015format.
3016
3017@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3018@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3019@cindex input file format in linker script
3020The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3021files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3022This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3023(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3024is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3025command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3026@end table
3027@end ifclear
3028
4a93e180
NC
3029@node REGION_ALIAS
3030@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3031@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3032@cindex region alias
3033@cindex region names
3034
3035Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3036@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3037
3038@smallexample
3039REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3040@end smallexample
3041
3042The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3043memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3044to memory regions. An example follows.
3045
3046Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3047memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3048that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3049non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3050access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3051read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3052sections:
3053
3054@itemize @bullet
3055@item
3056@code{.text} program code;
3057@item
3058@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3059@item
3060@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3061@item
3062@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3063@end itemize
3064
3065The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3066part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3067output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3068systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3069@code{C}:
3070@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3071@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3072@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3073@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3074@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3075@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3076@end multitable
3077The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3078loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3079the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3080the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3081
3082The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3083includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3084memory layout:
3085@smallexample
3086INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3087
3088SECTIONS
3089 @{
3090 .text :
3091 @{
3092 *(.text)
3093 @} > REGION_TEXT
3094 .rodata :
3095 @{
3096 *(.rodata)
3097 rodata_end = .;
3098 @} > REGION_RODATA
3099 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3100 @{
3101 data_start = .;
3102 *(.data)
3103 @} > REGION_DATA
3104 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3105 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3106 .bss :
3107 @{
3108 *(.bss)
3109 @} > REGION_BSS
3110 @}
3111@end smallexample
3112
3113Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3114regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3115variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3116@table @code
3117@item A
3118Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3119@smallexample
3120MEMORY
3121 @{
3122 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3123 @}
3124
3125REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3126REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3127REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3128REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3129@end smallexample
3130@item B
3131Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3132into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3133@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3134@smallexample
3135MEMORY
3136 @{
3137 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3138 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3139 @}
3140
3141REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3142REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3143REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3144REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3145@end smallexample
3146@item C
3147Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3148@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3149initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3150system start into the @code{RAM}.
3151@smallexample
3152MEMORY
3153 @{
3154 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3155 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3156 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3157 @}
3158
3159REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3160REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3161REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3162REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3163@end smallexample
3164@end table
3165
3166It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3167@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3168necessary:
3169@smallexample
3170#include <string.h>
3171
3172extern char data_start [];
3173extern char data_size [];
3174extern char data_load_start [];
3175
3176void copy_data(void)
3177@{
3178 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3179 @{
3180 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3181 @}
3182@}
3183@end smallexample
3184
252b5132 3185@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3186@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3187There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3188
3189@table @code
3190@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3191@kindex ASSERT
3192@cindex assertion in linker script
3193Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3194with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3195
3196@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3197@kindex EXTERN
3198@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3199Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3200symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3201modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3202each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3203command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3204
3205@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3206@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3207@cindex common allocation in linker script
3208This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3209to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3210output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3211
4818e05f
AM
3212@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3213@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3214@cindex common allocation in linker script
3215This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3216command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3217to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3218
53d25da6
AM
3219@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3220@kindex INSERT
3221@cindex insert user script into default script
3222This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3223augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3224inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3225@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3226default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3227sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3228linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3229insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3230linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3231default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3232of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3233to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3234is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3235
3236@smallexample
3237SECTIONS
3238@{
3239 OVERLAY :
3240 @{
3241 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3242 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3243 @}
3244@}
3245INSERT AFTER .text;
3246@end smallexample
3247
252b5132
RH
3248@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3249@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3250@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3251This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3252references among certain output sections.
3253
3254In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3255using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3256will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3257errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3258a function defined in the other section.
3259
3260The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3261@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3262an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3263@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3264names.
3265
3266@ifclear SingleFormat
3267@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3268@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3269@cindex machine architecture
3270@cindex architecture
3271Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3272of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3273architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3274the @samp{-f} option.
3275@end ifclear
3276@end table
3277
3278@node Assignments
3279@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3280@cindex assignment in scripts
3281@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3282@cindex variables, defining
3283You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3284the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3285
3286@menu
3287* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3288* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3289* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3290* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3291@end menu
3292
3293@node Simple Assignments
3294@subsection Simple Assignments
3295
3296You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3297
3298@table @code
3299@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3300@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3301@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3302@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3303@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3304@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3305@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3306@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3307@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3308@end table
3309
3310The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3311@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3312defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3313
3314The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3315may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3316
3317The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3318
3319Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3320
3321You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3322statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3323section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3324
3325The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3326expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3327
3328Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3329assignments may be used:
3330
3331@smallexample
3332floating_point = 0;
3333SECTIONS
3334@{
3335 .text :
3336 @{
3337 *(.text)
3338 _etext = .;
3339 @}
156e34dd 3340 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3341 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3342@}
3343@end smallexample
3344@noindent
3345In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3346zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3347the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3348defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3349upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3350
3351@node PROVIDE
3352@subsection PROVIDE
3353@cindex PROVIDE
3354In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3355only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3356the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3357@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3358@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3359@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3360@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3361@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3362
3363Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3364@smallexample
3365SECTIONS
3366@{
3367 .text :
3368 @{
3369 *(.text)
3370 _etext = .;
3371 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3372 @}
3373@}
3374@end smallexample
3375
3376In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3377underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3378the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3379underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3380If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3381linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3382
7af8e998
L
3383@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3384@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3385@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3386Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3387hidden and won't be exported.
3388
73ae6183
NC
3389@node Source Code Reference
3390@subsection Source Code Reference
3391
3392Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3393intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3394a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3395symbol that does not have a value.
3396
3397Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3398transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3399stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3400prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3401mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3402of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3403variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3404linker script variable might be referred to as:
3405
3406@smallexample
3407 extern int foo;
3408@end smallexample
3409
3410But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3411
3412@smallexample
3413 _foo = 1000;
3414@end smallexample
3415
3416In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3417transformation has taken place.
3418
3419When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3420things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3421in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3422second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3423table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3424contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3425value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3426
3427@smallexample
3428 int foo = 1000;
3429@end smallexample
3430
3431creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3432holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3433number 1000 is initially stored.
3434
3435When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3436first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3437memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3438So:
3439
3440@smallexample
3441 foo = 1;
3442@end smallexample
3443
3444looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3445associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3446address. Whereas:
3447
3448@smallexample
3449 int * a = & foo;
3450@end smallexample
3451
3452looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3453and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3454the variable @samp{a}.
3455
3456Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3457the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3458an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3459
3460@smallexample
3461 foo = 1000;
3462@end smallexample
3463
3464creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3465the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3466address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3467linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3468access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3469
3470Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3471you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3472use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3473section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3474linker script contains these declarations:
3475
3476@smallexample
3477@group
3478 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3479 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3480 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3481@end group
3482@end smallexample
3483
3484Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3485
3486@smallexample
3487@group
3488 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3489
73ae6183
NC
3490 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3491@end group
3492@end smallexample
3493
3494Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3495
252b5132 3496@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3497@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3498@kindex SECTIONS
3499The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3500into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3501
3502The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3503@smallexample
3504SECTIONS
3505@{
3506 @var{sections-command}
3507 @var{sections-command}
3508 @dots{}
3509@}
3510@end smallexample
3511
3512Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3513
3514@itemize @bullet
3515@item
3516an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3517@item
3518a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3519@item
3520an output section description
3521@item
3522an overlay description
3523@end itemize
3524
3525The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3526@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3527those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3528understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3529the layout of the output file.
3530
3531Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3532below.
3533
3534If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3535linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3536section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3537input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3538example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3539in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3540
3541@menu
3542* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3543* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3544* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3545* Input Section:: Input section description
3546* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3547* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3548* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3549* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3550* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3551@end menu
3552
3553@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3554@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3555The full description of an output section looks like this:
3556@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3557@group
7e7d5768 3558@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3559 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3560 @{
3561 @var{output-section-command}
3562 @var{output-section-command}
3563 @dots{}
562d3460 3564 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3565@end group
3566@end smallexample
3567
3568Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3569
3570The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3571name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3572The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3573
3574Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3575
3576@itemize @bullet
3577@item
3578a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3579@item
3580an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3581@item
3582data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3583@item
3584a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3585@end itemize
3586
3587@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3588@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3589@cindex name, section
3590@cindex section name
3591The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3592meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3593support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3594must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3595example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3596output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3597names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3598quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3599characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3600commas must be quoted.
3601
3602The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3603Discarding}.
3604
3605@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3606@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3607@cindex address, section
3608@cindex section address
3609The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3610address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3611the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3612based on the current value of the location counter.
3613
3614If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3615set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3616@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3617current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3618requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3619output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3620within the output section.
3621
3622For example,
3623@smallexample
3624.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3625@end smallexample
3626@noindent
3627and
3628@smallexample
3629.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3630@end smallexample
3631@noindent
3632are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3633@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3634counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3635counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3636section.
3637
3638The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3639For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3640so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3641do something like this:
3642@smallexample
3643.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3644@end smallexample
3645@noindent
3646This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3647aligned upward to the specified value.
3648
3649Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3650location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3651sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3652
3653@node Input Section
36f63dca 3654@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3655@cindex input sections
3656@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3657The most common output section command is an input section description.
3658
3659The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3660You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3661in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3662map the input files into your memory layout.
3663
3664@menu
3665* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3666* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3667* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3668* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3669* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3670@end menu
3671
3672@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3673@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3674@cindex input section basics
3675An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3676by a list of section names in parentheses.
3677
3678The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3679describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3680
3681The most common input section description is to include all input
3682sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3683include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3684@smallexample
3685*(.text)
3686@end smallexample
3687@noindent
18625d54
CM
3688Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3689of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3690match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3691example:
252b5132 3692@smallexample
b4346c09 3693*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3694@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3695will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3696@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3697
3698There are two ways to include more than one section:
3699@smallexample
3700*(.text .rdata)
3701*(.text) *(.rdata)
3702@end smallexample
3703@noindent
3704The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3705@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3706first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3707they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3708@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3709@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3710
3711You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3712You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3713needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3714@smallexample
3715data.o(.data)
3716@end smallexample
3717
967928e9
AM
3718You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3719matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3720with no whitespace around the colon.
3721
3722@table @samp
3723@item archive:file
3724matches file within archive
3725@item archive:
3726matches the whole archive
3727@item :file
3728matches file but not one in an archive
3729@end table
3730
3731Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3732wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3733single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3734@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3735within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3736also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3737other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3738from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3739command.
3740
252b5132
RH
3741If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3742the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3743commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3744@smallexample
3745data.o
3746@end smallexample
3747
967928e9
AM
3748When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3749and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3750characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3751name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3752did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3753though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3754@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3755the archive search path.
3756
3757@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3758@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3759@cindex input section wildcards
3760@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3761@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3762@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3763In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3764name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3765
3766The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3767pattern for the file name.
3768
3769The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3770
3771@table @samp
3772@item *
3773matches any number of characters
3774@item ?
3775matches any single character
3776@item [@var{chars}]
3777matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3778character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3779@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3780@item \
3781quotes the following character
3782@end table
3783
3784When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3785will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3786Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3787exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3788@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3789a @samp{/} character.
3790
3791File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3792specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3793does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3794
3795If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3796appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3797will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3798sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3799@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3800@smallexample
3801.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3802.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3803@end smallexample
3804
bcaa7b3e 3805@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3806Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3807in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3808this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3809pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3810@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3811into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3812
bcaa7b3e
L
3813@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3814@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3815difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3816ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3817
3818@cindex SORT
3819@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3820
3821When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3822can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3823
3824@enumerate
3825@item
3826@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3827It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3828sections have the same name.
3829@item
3830@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3831It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3832sections have the same alignment.
3833@item
c0065db7 3834@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3835treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3836@item
3837@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3838is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3839@item
3840All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3841@end enumerate
3842
3843When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3844section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3845takes precedence over the command line option.
3846
3847If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3848command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3849treated as nested sorting command.
3850
3851@enumerate
3852@item
3853@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3854@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3855@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3856@item
3857@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3858@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3859@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3860@end enumerate
3861
3862If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3863command line option will be ignored.
3864
252b5132
RH
3865If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3866@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3867precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3868
3869This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3870files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3871sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3872The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3873with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3874linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3875@smallexample
3876@group
3877SECTIONS @{
3878 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3879 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3880 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3881 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3882@}
3883@end group
3884@end smallexample
3885
3886@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3887@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3888@cindex common symbol placement
3889@cindex uninitialized data placement
3890A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3891file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3892linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3893named @samp{COMMON}.
3894
3895You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3896other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3897particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3898input files are placed in another section.
3899
3900In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3901@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3902@smallexample
3903.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3904@end smallexample
3905
3906@cindex scommon section
3907@cindex small common symbols
3908Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3909example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3910symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3911different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3912the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3913symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3914to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3915locations.
3916
3917@cindex [COMMON]
3918You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3919notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3920@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3921
3922@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3923@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3924@cindex KEEP
3925@cindex garbage collection
3926When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3927it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3928This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3929with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3930@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3931
3932@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3933@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3934The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3935to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3936start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3937@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3938follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3939@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3940@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3941All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3942files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3943
3944@smallexample
3945@group
3946SECTIONS @{
3947 outputa 0x10000 :
3948 @{
3949 all.o
3950 foo.o (.input1)
3951 @}
36f63dca
NC
3952@end group
3953@group
252b5132
RH
3954 outputb :
3955 @{
3956 foo.o (.input2)
3957 foo1.o (.input1)
3958 @}
36f63dca
NC
3959@end group
3960@group
252b5132
RH
3961 outputc :
3962 @{
3963 *(.input1)
3964 *(.input2)
3965 @}
3966@}
3967@end group
a1ab1d2a 3968@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3969
3970@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3971@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3972@cindex data
3973@cindex section data
3974@cindex output section data
3975@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3976@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3977@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3978@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3979@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3980You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3981@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3982an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3983parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3984value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3985counter.
3986
3987The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3988store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3989bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3990stored.
3991
3992For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3993of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3994@smallexample
3995BYTE(1)
3996LONG(addr)
3997@end smallexample
3998
3999When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4000same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4001target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4002@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4003@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4004
4005If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4006which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4007When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4008true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4009endianness of the first input object file.
4010
36f63dca 4011Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4012between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4013@smallexample
4014SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4015@end smallexample
4016whereas this will work:
4017@smallexample
4018SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4019@end smallexample
4020
252b5132
RH
4021@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4022@cindex holes, filling
4023@cindex unspecified memory
4024You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4025current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4026otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4027gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4028with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4029necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4030point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4031than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4032different parts of an output section.
4033
4034This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4035value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4036@smallexample
563e308f 4037FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4038@end smallexample
4039
4040The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4041section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4042part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4043entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4044precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4045expression.
252b5132
RH
4046
4047@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4048@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4049There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4050commands.
4051
4052@table @code
4053@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4054@cindex input filename symbols
4055@cindex filename symbols
4056@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4057The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4058The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4059file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4060the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4061
4062This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4063normally used for any other object file format.
4064
4065@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4066@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4067@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4068@item CONSTRUCTORS
4069When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4070unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4071destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4072arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4073automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4074For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4075linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4076@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4077ignored for other object file formats.
4078
4079The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4080constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4081Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4082the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4083first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4084of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4085compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4086formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4087@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4088the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4089destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4090@code{exit}.
4091
4092For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4093arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4094addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4095and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4096linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4097runtime code expects to see.
4098
4099@smallexample
4100 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4101 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4102 *(.ctors)
4103 LONG(0)
4104 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4105 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4106 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4107 *(.dtors)
4108 LONG(0)
4109 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4110@end smallexample
4111
4112If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4113which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4114are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4115are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4116command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4117@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4118@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4119@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4120
4121Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4122and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4123need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4124scripts.
4125
4126@end table
4127
4128@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4129@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4130@cindex discarding sections
4131@cindex sections, discarding
4132@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4133The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4134for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4135be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4136@smallexample
49c13adb 4137.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4138@end smallexample
4139@noindent
4140will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4141@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4142sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4143space in an output section will also create the output section.
4144
a0976ea4 4145The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4146on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4147symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4148the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4149section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4150
4151@cindex /DISCARD/
4152The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4153input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4154section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4155
4156@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4157@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4158@cindex output section attributes
4159We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4160like this:
4161@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4162@group
7e7d5768 4163@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 4164 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
4165 @{
4166 @var{output-section-command}
4167 @var{output-section-command}
4168 @dots{}
562d3460 4169 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4170@end group
4171@end smallexample
4172We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4173@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4174remaining section attributes.
4175
a1ab1d2a 4176@menu
252b5132
RH
4177* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4178* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4179* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4180* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
4181* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4182* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4183* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4184@end menu
4185
4186@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4187@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4188Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4189parentheses. The following types are defined:
4190
4191@table @code
4192@item NOLOAD
4193The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4194loaded into memory when the program is run.
4195@item DSECT
4196@itemx COPY
4197@itemx INFO
4198@itemx OVERLAY
4199These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4200rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4201marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4202section when the program is run.
4203@end table
4204
4205@kindex NOLOAD
4206@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4207@cindex loading, preventing
4208The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4209the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4210the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4211@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4212need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4213@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4214@smallexample
4215@group
4216SECTIONS @{
4217 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4218 @dots{}
4219@}
4220@end group
4221@end smallexample
4222
4223@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4224@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4225@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4226@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4227@cindex load address
4228@cindex section load address
4229Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4230@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4231an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4232Address}).
4233
dc0b6aa0
AM
4234The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4235the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4236
4237Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4238specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4239Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4240linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4241
4242If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4243section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4244VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4245section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4246or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4247to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4248@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4249
4250@cindex ROM initialized data
4251@cindex initialized data in ROM
4252This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4253example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4254called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4255@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4256even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4257uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4258defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4259counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4260
4261@smallexample
4262@group
4263SECTIONS
4264 @{
4265 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4266 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4267 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4268 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4269 .bss 0x3000 :
4270 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4271@}
4272@end group
4273@end smallexample
4274
4275The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4276this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4277the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4278how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4279script.
4280
4281@smallexample
4282@group
4283extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4284char *src = &_etext;
4285char *dst = &_data;
4286
4287/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4288while (dst < &_edata) @{
4289 *dst++ = *src++;
4290@}
4291
4292/* Zero bss */
4293for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4294 *dst = 0;
4295@end group
4296@end smallexample
4297
bbf115d3
L
4298@node Forced Output Alignment
4299@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4300@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4301@cindex forcing output section alignment
4302@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4303You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4304
7e7d5768
AM
4305@node Forced Input Alignment
4306@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4307@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4308@cindex forcing input section alignment
4309@cindex input section alignment
4310You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4311SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4312sections, whether larger or smaller.
4313
252b5132 4314@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4315@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4316@kindex >@var{region}
4317@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4318@cindex memory regions and sections
4319You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4320using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4321
4322Here is a simple example:
4323@smallexample
4324@group
4325MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4326SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4327@end group
4328@end smallexample
4329
4330@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4331@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4332@kindex :@var{phdr}
4333@cindex section, assigning to program header
4334@cindex program headers and sections
4335You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4336using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4337one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4338assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4339@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4340linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4341
4342Here is a simple example:
4343@smallexample
4344@group
4345PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4346SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4347@end group
4348@end smallexample
4349
4350@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4351@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4352@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4353@cindex section fill pattern
4354@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4355You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4356@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4357(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4358within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4359alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4360necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4361of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4362an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4363fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4364other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4365pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4366expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4367
4368You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4369output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4370
4371Here is a simple example:
4372@smallexample
4373@group
563e308f 4374SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4375@end group
4376@end smallexample
4377
4378@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4379@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4380@kindex OVERLAY
4381@cindex overlays
4382An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4383are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4384the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4385copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4386required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4387can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4388than another.
4389
4390Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4391@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4392output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4393command is as follows:
4394@smallexample
4395@group
4396OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4397 @{
4398 @var{secname1}
4399 @{
4400 @var{output-section-command}
4401 @var{output-section-command}
4402 @dots{}
4403 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4404 @var{secname2}
4405 @{
4406 @var{output-section-command}
4407 @var{output-section-command}
4408 @dots{}
4409 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4410 @dots{}
4411 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4412@end group
4413@end smallexample
4414
4415Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4416section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4417section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4418those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4419except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4420sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4421
4422The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4423addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4424memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4425whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4426and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4427and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4428
4429If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4430among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4431all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4432section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4433NOCROSSREFS}.
4434
4435For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4436provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4437defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4438@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4439the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4440within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4441symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4442
4443At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4444the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4445
4446Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4447@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4448@smallexample
4449@group
4450 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4451 @{
4452 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4453 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4454 @}
4455@end group
4456@end smallexample
4457@noindent
4458This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4459address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4460@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4461following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4462@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4463@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4464
4465C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4466like the following.
4467
4468@smallexample
4469@group
4470 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4471 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4472 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4473@end group
4474@end smallexample
4475
4476Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4477everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4478example could have been written identically as follows.
4479
4480@smallexample
4481@group
4482 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4483 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4484 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4485 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4486 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4487 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4488 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4489@end group
4490@end smallexample
4491
4492@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4493@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4494@kindex MEMORY
4495@cindex memory regions
4496@cindex regions of memory
4497@cindex allocating memory
4498@cindex discontinuous memory
4499The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4500memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4501
4502The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4503memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4504may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4505can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4506set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4507regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4508around to fit into the available regions.
4509
4510A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4511command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4512you wish. The syntax is:
4513@smallexample
4514@group
a1ab1d2a 4515MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4516 @{
4517 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4518 @dots{}
4519 @}
4520@end group
4521@end smallexample
4522
4523The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4524region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4525Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4526with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4527must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4528add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4529command.
252b5132
RH
4530
4531@cindex memory region attributes
4532The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4533whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4534not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4535@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4536section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4537the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4538them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4539
4540The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4541@table @samp
4542@item R
4543Read-only section
4544@item W
4545Read/write section
4546@item X
4547Executable section
4548@item A
4549Allocatable section
4550@item I
4551Initialized section
4552@item L
4553Same as @samp{I}
4554@item !
4555Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4556@end table
4557
4558If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4559@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4560attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4561in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4562attributes.
4563
4564@kindex ORIGIN =
4565@kindex o =
4566@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4567The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4568the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4569cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4570abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4571@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4572
4573@kindex LENGTH =
4574@kindex len =
4575@kindex l =
4576The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4577region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4578be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4579@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4580
4581In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4582available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4583and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4584linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4585is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4586or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4587explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4588region.
4589
4590@smallexample
4591@group
a1ab1d2a 4592MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4593 @{
4594 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4595 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4596 @}
4597@end group
4598@end smallexample
4599
4600Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4601specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4602@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4603a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4604output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4605was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4606the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4607output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4608region, the linker will issue an error message.
4609
3ec57632 4610It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4611expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4612@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4613
4614@smallexample
4615@group
c0065db7 4616 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4617@end group
4618@end smallexample
4619
252b5132
RH
4620@node PHDRS
4621@section PHDRS Command
4622@kindex PHDRS
4623@cindex program headers
4624@cindex ELF program headers
4625@cindex program segments
4626@cindex segments, ELF
4627The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4628@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4629loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4630program with the @samp{-p} option.
4631
4632When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4633reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4634program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4635This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4636interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4637
4638The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4639in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4640precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4641the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4642not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4643
4644The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4645generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4646ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4647
4648This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4649@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4650
4651@smallexample
4652@group
4653PHDRS
4654@{
4655 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4656 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4657@}
4658@end group
4659@end smallexample
4660
4661The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4662of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4663header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4664with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4665must have a distinct name.
4666
4667Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4668system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4669specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4670sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4671attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4672Section Phdr}.
4673
4674It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4675merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4676repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4677contain the section.
4678
4679If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4680then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4681not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4682convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4683placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4684default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4685segment at all.
4686
4687@kindex FILEHDR
4688@kindex PHDRS
4689You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4690the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4691The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4692file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4693include the ELF program headers themselves.
4694
4695The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4696value of the keyword.
4697
4698@table @asis
4699@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4700Indicates an unused program header.
4701
4702@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4703Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4704the file.
4705
4706@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4707Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4708
4709@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4710Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4711found.
4712
4713@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4714Indicates a segment holding note information.
4715
4716@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4717A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4718ABI.
4719
4720@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4721Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4722
4723@item @var{expression}
4724An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4725be used for types not defined above.
4726@end table
4727
4728You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4729in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4730@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4731Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4732output section attribute.
4733
4734The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4735which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4736explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4737an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4738header.
4739
4740Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4741headers used on a native ELF system.
4742
4743@example
4744@group
4745PHDRS
4746@{
4747 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4748 interp PT_INTERP ;
4749 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4750 data PT_LOAD ;
4751 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4752@}
4753
4754SECTIONS
4755@{
4756 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4757 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4758 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4759 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4760 @dots{}
4761 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4762 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4763 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4764 @dots{}
4765@}
4766@end group
4767@end example
4768
4769@node VERSION
4770@section VERSION Command
4771@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4772@cindex symbol versions
4773@cindex version script
4774@cindex versions of symbols
4775The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4776only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4777symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4778a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4779shared library.
4780
4781You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4782you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4783also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4784
4785The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4786@smallexample
4787VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4788@end smallexample
4789
4790The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4791Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4792version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4793version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4794version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4795scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4796library.
4797
4798The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4799examples.
4800
4801@smallexample
4802VERS_1.1 @{
4803 global:
4804 foo1;
4805 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4806 old*;
4807 original*;
4808 new*;
252b5132
RH
4809@};
4810
4811VERS_1.2 @{
4812 foo2;
4813@} VERS_1.1;
4814
4815VERS_2.0 @{
4816 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4817 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4818 ns::*;
4819 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4820 @}
252b5132
RH
4821@} VERS_1.2;
4822@end smallexample
4823
4824This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4825version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4826The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4827a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4828of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4829symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4830is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4831in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4832However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4833name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4834
4835Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4836depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4837to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4838
4839Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4840depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4841and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4842
4843When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4844specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4845unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4846unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4847somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4848wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4849wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4850set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4851ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4852
4853The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4854they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4855could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4856However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4857
0f6bf451 4858Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4859in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4860symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4861won't.
4862
4863@smallexample
7c9c73be 4864@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4865@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4866
252b5132
RH
4867When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4868symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4869requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4870shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4871loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4872linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4873application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4874way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4875all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4876search for each symbol reference.
4877
4878The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4879doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4880that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4881functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4882the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4883required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4884that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4885versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4886the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4887
4888There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4889first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4890source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4891script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4892maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4893@smallexample
4894__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4895@end smallexample
4896@noindent
4897in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4898be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4899The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4900@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4901takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4902
4903The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4904function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4905an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4906version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4907linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4908
4909To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4910source file. Here is an example:
4911
4912@smallexample
4913__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4914__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4915__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4916__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4917@end smallexample
4918
4919In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4920unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4921example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4922@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4923
4924When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4925some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4926this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4927@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4928declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4929you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4930
4931If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4932within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4933(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4934specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4935
cb840a31
L
4936You can also specify the language in the version script:
4937
4938@smallexample
4939VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4940@end smallexample
4941
c0065db7 4942The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4943The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4944demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4945patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4946
86043bbb
MM
4947Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4948described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4949or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4950the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4951whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4952cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4953might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4954should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4955expect when you upgrade.
4956
252b5132
RH
4957@node Expressions
4958@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4959@cindex expressions
4960@cindex arithmetic
4961The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4962that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4963expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4964host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4965
4966You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4967
4968The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4969expressions.
4970
4971@menu
4972* Constants:: Constants
4973* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4974* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4975* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4976* Operators:: Operators
4977* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4978* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4979* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4980@end menu
4981
4982@node Constants
4983@subsection Constants
4984@cindex integer notation
4985@cindex constants in linker scripts
4986All constants are integers.
4987
4988As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4989octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
4990hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
4991@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
4992@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
4993value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
4994
4995@cindex scaled integers
4996@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4997@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4998@cindex suffixes for integers
4999@cindex integer suffixes
5000In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5001constant by
5002@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5003@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5004@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5005@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5006@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5007@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5008@tex
5009${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5010@end tex
5011@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5012respectively. For example, the following
5013all refer to the same quantity:
5014
252b5132 5015@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5016_fourk_1 = 4K;
5017_fourk_2 = 4096;
5018_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5019_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5020@end smallexample
5021
8a308ae8
NC
5022Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5023conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5024
252b5132
RH
5025@node Symbols
5026@subsection Symbol Names
5027@cindex symbol names
5028@cindex names
5029@cindex quoted symbol names
5030@kindex "
5031Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5032and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5033Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5034specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5035keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5036@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5037"SECTION" = 9;
5038"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5039@end smallexample
5040
5041Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5042to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5043whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5044
ecca9871
L
5045@node Orphan Sections
5046@subsection Orphan Sections
5047@cindex orphan
5048Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5049are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5050script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5051output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5052placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5053attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5054same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5055If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5056at the end of the file.
5057
5058For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5059well as section flag.
5060
41911f68 5061If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5062the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5063__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5064section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5065orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5066representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5067character.
5068
252b5132
RH
5069@node Location Counter
5070@subsection The Location Counter
5071@kindex .
5072@cindex dot
5073@cindex location counter
5074@cindex current output location
5075The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5076current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5077location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5078within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5079anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5080
5081@cindex holes
5082Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5083moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5084location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5085and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5086doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5087
5088@smallexample
5089SECTIONS
5090@{
5091 output :
5092 @{
5093 file1(.text)
5094 . = . + 1000;
5095 file2(.text)
5096 . += 1000;
5097 file3(.text)
563e308f 5098 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5099@}
5100@end smallexample
5101@noindent
5102In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5103located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5104followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5105@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5106@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5107specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5108
5c6bbab8
NC
5109@cindex dot inside sections
5110Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5111current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5112statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5113absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5114however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5115not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5116
5117@smallexample
5118SECTIONS
5119@{
5120 . = 0x100
5121 .text: @{
5122 *(.text)
5123 . = 0x200
5124 @}
5125 . = 0x500
5126 .data: @{
5127 *(.data)
5128 . += 0x600
5129 @}
5130@}
5131@end smallexample
5132
5133The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5134and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5135the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5136much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5137move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5138and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5139the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5140the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5141
b5666f2f
AM
5142@cindex dot outside sections
5143Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5144output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5145needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5146
5147@smallexample
5148SECTIONS
5149@{
5150 start_of_text = . ;
5151 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5152 end_of_text = . ;
5153
5154 start_of_data = . ;
5155 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5156 end_of_data = . ;
5157@}
5158@end smallexample
5159
5160If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5161not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5162between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5163should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5164blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5165the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5166sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5167statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5168special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5169place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5170as follows:
5171
5172@smallexample
5173SECTIONS
5174@{
5175 start_of_text = . ;
5176 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5177 end_of_text = . ;
5178
5179 start_of_data = . ;
5180 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5181 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5182 end_of_data = . ;
5183@}
5184@end smallexample
5185
5186This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5187@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5188placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5189assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5190a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5191section. So you could write:
5192
5193@smallexample
5194SECTIONS
5195@{
5196 start_of_text = . ;
5197 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5198 end_of_text = . ;
5199
5200 . = . ;
5201 start_of_data = . ;
5202 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5203 end_of_data = . ;
5204@}
5205@end smallexample
5206
5207Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5208@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5209
252b5132
RH
5210@need 2000
5211@node Operators
5212@subsection Operators
5213@cindex operators for arithmetic
5214@cindex arithmetic operators
5215@cindex precedence in expressions
5216The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5217the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5218@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5219@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5220@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5221@smallexample
5222precedence associativity Operators Notes
5223(highest)
52241 left ! - ~ (1)
52252 left * / %
52263 left + -
52274 left >> <<
52285 left == != > < <= >=
52296 left &
52307 left |
52318 left &&
52329 left ||
523310 right ? :
523411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5235(lowest)
5236@end smallexample
5237Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5238(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5239(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5240@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5241@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5242@tex
5243\vskip \baselineskip
5244%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5245\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5246\hrule
5247\halign
5248{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5249height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5250&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5251height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5252\noalign{\hrule}
5253height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5254&highest&&&&&\cr
5255% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5256&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5257&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5258&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5259&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5260&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5261&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5262&7&&left&&|&\cr
5263&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5264&9&&left&&||&\cr
5265&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5266&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5267&lowest&&&&&\cr
5268height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5269\hrule}
5270@end tex
5271@iftex
5272{
5273@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5274@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5275@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5276}
5277@end iftex
5278@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5279
5280@node Evaluation
5281@subsection Evaluation
5282@cindex lazy evaluation
5283@cindex expression evaluation order
5284The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5285an expression when absolutely necessary.
5286
5287The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5288address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5289regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5290as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5291
5292However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5293until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5294other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5295for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5296
5297The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5298assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5299allocation.
5300
5301Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5302@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5303
5304If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5305available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5306following
5307@smallexample
5308@group
5309SECTIONS
5310 @{
a1ab1d2a 5311 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5312 @{ *(.text) @}
5313 @}
5314@end group
5315@end smallexample
5316@noindent
5317will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5318address}.
5319
5320@node Expression Section
5321@subsection The Section of an Expression
5322@cindex expression sections
5323@cindex absolute expressions
5324@cindex relative expressions
5325@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5326@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5327@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5328When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5329or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5330fixed offset from the base of a section.
5331
5332The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5333whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5334an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5335section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5336
5337A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5338relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5339further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5340section will be the section of the relative expression.
5341
5342A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5343through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5344will not have any particular associated section.
5345
5346You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5347to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5348create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5349section @samp{.data}:
5350@smallexample
5351SECTIONS
5352 @{
5353 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5354 @}
5355@end smallexample
5356@noindent
5357If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5358@samp{.data} section.
5359
5360@node Builtin Functions
5361@subsection Builtin Functions
5362@cindex functions in expressions
5363The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5364use in linker script expressions.
5365
5366@table @code
5367@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5368@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5369@cindex expression, absolute
5370Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5371of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5372value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5373normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5374
5375@item ADDR(@var{section})
5376@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5377@cindex section address in expression
5378Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5379script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5380the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5381identical values:
5382@smallexample
5383@group
5384SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5385 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5386 @{
252b5132
RH
5387 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5388 @dots{}
5389 @}
5390 .output :
5391 @{
5392 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5393 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5394 @}
5395@dots{} @}
5396@end group
5397@end smallexample
5398
876f4090
NS
5399@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5400@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5401@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5402@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5403@cindex round up location counter
5404@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5405@cindex round up expression
5406@cindex align expression
5407Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5408to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5409doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5410arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5411expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5412equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5413
5414Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5415next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5416variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5417input sections:
252b5132
RH
5418@smallexample
5419@group
5420SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5421 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5422 *(.data)
5423 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5424 @}
5425@dots{} @}
5426@end group
5427@end smallexample
5428@noindent
5429The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5430a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5431a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5432of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5433
5434The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5435
362c1d1a
NS
5436@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5437@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5438@cindex section alignment
5439Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5440been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5441evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5442the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5443value in that section.
5444@smallexample
5445@group
5446SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5447 .output @{
5448 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5449 @dots{}
5450 @}
5451@dots{} @}
5452@end group
5453@end smallexample
5454
252b5132
RH
5455@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5456@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5457This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5458scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5459section.
5460
2d20f7bf
JJ
5461@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5462@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5463This is equivalent to either
5464@smallexample
5465(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5466@end smallexample
5467or
5468@smallexample
5469(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5470@end smallexample
5471@noindent
5472depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5473for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5474@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5475If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5476memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5477bytes in the on-disk file.
5478
5479This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5480any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5481@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5482be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5483working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5484
5485@noindent
5486Example:
5487@smallexample
5488 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5489@end smallexample
5490
5491@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5492@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5493This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5494evaluation purposes.
5495
5496@smallexample
5497 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5498@end smallexample
5499
a4f5ad88
JJ
5500@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5501@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5502This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5503@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5504When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5505does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5506@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5507boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5508it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5509@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5510
5511@smallexample
5512 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5513@end smallexample
5514
252b5132
RH
5515@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5516@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5517@cindex symbol defaults
5518Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5519defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5520return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5521default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5522shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5523the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5524existed, its value is preserved:
5525
5526@smallexample
5527@group
5528SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5529 .text : @{
5530 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5531 @dots{}
5532 @}
5533 @dots{}
5534@}
5535@end group
5536@end smallexample
5537
3ec57632
NC
5538@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5539@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5540Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5541
252b5132
RH
5542@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5543@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5544@cindex section load address in expression
5545Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5546the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5547attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5548Section LMA}).
5549
5550@kindex MAX
5551@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5552Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5553
5554@kindex MIN
5555@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5556Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5557
5558@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5559@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5560@cindex unallocated address, next
5561Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5562This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5563use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5564output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5565
3ec57632
NC
5566@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5567@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5568Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5569
ba916c8a
MM
5570@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5571@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5572Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5573value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5574option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5575@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5576be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5577``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5578name.
5579
252b5132
RH
5580@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5581@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5582@cindex section size
5583Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5584been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5585evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5586@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5587@smallexample
5588@group
5589SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5590 .output @{
5591 .start = . ;
5592 @dots{}
5593 .end = . ;
5594 @}
5595 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5596 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5597@dots{} @}
5598@end group
5599@end smallexample
5600
5601@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5602@itemx sizeof_headers
5603@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5604@cindex header size
5605Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5606information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5607this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5608choose, to facilitate paging.
5609
5610@cindex not enough room for program headers
5611@cindex program headers, not enough room
5612When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5613@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5614number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5615addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5616additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5617room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5618the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5619script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5620you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5621command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5622@end table
5623
5624@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5625@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5626@cindex implicit linker scripts
5627If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5628an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5629linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5630linker will report an error.
5631
5632An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5633
5634Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5635assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5636commands.
5637
5638Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5639at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5640read. This can affect archive searching.
5641
5642@ifset GENERIC
5643@node Machine Dependent
5644@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5645
5646@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5647@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5648sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5649functionality are not listed.
5650
5651@menu
36f63dca
NC
5652@ifset H8300
5653* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5654@end ifset
5655@ifset I960
5656* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5657@end ifset
5658@ifset ARM
5659* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5660@end ifset
5661@ifset HPPA
5662* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5663@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5664@ifset M68K
5665* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5666@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5667@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5668* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5669@end ifset
2469cfa2 5670@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5671* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5672@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5673@ifset M68HC11
5674* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5675@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5676@ifset POWERPC
5677* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5678@end ifset
5679@ifset POWERPC64
5680* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5681@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5682@ifset SPU
5683* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5684@end ifset
74459f0e 5685@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5686* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5687@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5688@ifset WIN32
5689* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5690@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5691@ifset XTENSA
5692* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5693@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5694@end menu
5695@end ifset
5696
252b5132
RH
5697@ifset H8300
5698@ifclear GENERIC
5699@raisesections
5700@end ifclear
5701
5702@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5703@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5704
5705@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5706For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5707you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5708
5709@table @emph
5710@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5711@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5712@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5713targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5714program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5715respectively.
5716
5717@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5718@item synthesizing instructions
5719@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5720@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5721sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5722page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5723(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5724@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5725top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5726
5727@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5728@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5729biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5730which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5731page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5732(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5733@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5734the top page of memory).
5735
5736@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5737@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
573832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5739changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5740(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5741@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5742the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5743@end table
5744
5745@ifclear GENERIC
5746@lowersections
5747@end ifclear
5748@end ifset
5749
36f63dca 5750@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5751@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5752@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5753@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5754@node Renesas
5755@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5756
c2dcd04e
NC
5757@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5758H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5759options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5760@end ifset
5761@end ifclear
5762
5763@ifset I960
5764@ifclear GENERIC
5765@raisesections
5766@end ifclear
5767
5768@node i960
5769@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5770
5771@cindex i960 support
5772
5773You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5774specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5775family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5776incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5777linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5778libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5779search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5780
5781For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5782well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5783paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5784the names
5785
5786@smallexample
5787@group
5788try
5789libtry.a
5790tryca
5791libtryca.a
5792@end group
5793@end smallexample
5794
5795@noindent
5796The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5797two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5798
5799You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5800the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5801use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5802specifies a library.
5803
5804@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5805@cindex relaxing on i960
5806@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5807you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5808@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5809them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5810instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5811instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5812target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5813not itself call any subroutines).
5814
5815@ifclear GENERIC
5816@lowersections
5817@end ifclear
5818@end ifset
5819
5820@ifset ARM
5821@ifclear GENERIC
5822@raisesections
5823@end ifclear
5824
93fd0973
SC
5825@ifset M68HC11
5826@ifclear GENERIC
5827@raisesections
5828@end ifclear
5829
5830@node M68HC11/68HC12
5831@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5832
5833@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5834
5835@subsection Linker Relaxation
5836
5837For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5838optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5839
5840@table @emph
5841@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5842@item relaxing address modes
5843@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5844targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5845program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5846respectively.
5847
5848@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5849transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5850page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5851
5852@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5853When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5854of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5855addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5856@code{bset} instructions.
5857
5858@end table
5859
5860@subsection Trampoline Generation
5861
5862@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5863@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5864For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5865call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5866will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5867trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5868case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5869point to the function trampoline.
5870
5871@ifclear GENERIC
5872@lowersections
5873@end ifclear
5874@end ifset
5875
36f63dca 5876@node ARM
3674e28a 5877@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5878
5879@cindex ARM interworking support
5880@kindex --support-old-code
5881For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5882between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5883been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5884line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5885libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5886option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5887given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5888which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5889the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5890non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5891
5892@cindex thumb entry point
5893@cindex entry point, thumb
5894@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5895The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5896@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5897But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5898branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5899executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5900
ce11ba6c
KT
5901@cindex PE import table prefixing
5902@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
5903The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
5904the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5905elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5906import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5907
e489d0ae
PB
5908@cindex BE8
5909@kindex --be8
5910The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5911executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5912The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5913
3674e28a
PB
5914@cindex TARGET1
5915@kindex --target1-rel
5916@kindex --target1-abs
5917The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5918@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5919or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5920and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5921
5922@cindex TARGET2
5923@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5924The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5925@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5926meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5927@table @samp
5928@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5929@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5930@item abs
5931@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5932@item got-rel
5933@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5934@end table
5935
319850b4
JB
5936@cindex FIX_V4BX
5937@kindex --fix-v4bx
5938The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5939specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5940interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5941also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5942
5943In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5944linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5945@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5946
5947In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5948relocations are ignored.
5949
845b51d6
PB
5950@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5951@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5952Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5953relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5954
5955@smallexample
5956TST rM, #1
5957MOVEQ PC, rM
5958BX Rn
5959@end smallexample
5960
5961This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5962and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5963condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5964
33bfe774
JB
5965@cindex USE_BLX
5966@kindex --use-blx
5967The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5968BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5969situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5970code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5971each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5972
5973This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5974specify it if you are using that target.
5975
c6dd86c6
JB
5976@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5977@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5978The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5979bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5980instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5981to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5982the support code can read the intended values.
5983
5984The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5985intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5986and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5987intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5988full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5989you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5990
5991If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5992enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5993@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5994mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5995vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5996@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5997
5998If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5999potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6000such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6001first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6002instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6003the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6004are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6005
bf21ed78
MS
6006@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6007@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6008The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6009warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6010enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6011linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6012using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6013not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6014
6015@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6016@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6017The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6018warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6019@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6020linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6021using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6022
726150b7
NC
6023@cindex PIC_VENEER
6024@kindex --pic-veneer
6025The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6026ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6027is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6028@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6029
6030@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6031@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6032The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6033code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6034perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6035placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6036controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6037The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6038duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6039group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6040code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6041where they should be placed.
6042
6043The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6044@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6045placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6046branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6047placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6048value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6049exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6050A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6051linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6052from the input sections.
6053
6054The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6055@samp{N = +1}.
6056
1a51c1a4
NC
6057Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6058only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6059otherwise.
6060
36f63dca
NC
6061@ifclear GENERIC
6062@lowersections
6063@end ifclear
6064@end ifset
6065
6066@ifset HPPA
6067@ifclear GENERIC
6068@raisesections
6069@end ifclear
6070
6071@node HPPA ELF32
6072@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6073@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6074@kindex --multi-subspace
6075When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6076import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6077The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6078stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6079multiple sub-spaces.
6080
6081@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6082@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6083Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6084stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6085@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6086sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6087a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6088the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6089conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6090prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6091A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6092branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6093@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6094@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6095detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6096positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6097
6098Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6099single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6100create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6101large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6102
6103@ifclear GENERIC
6104@lowersections
6105@end ifclear
6106@end ifset
6107
7fb9f789
NC
6108@ifset M68K
6109@ifclear GENERIC
6110@raisesections
6111@end ifclear
6112
6113@node M68K
6114@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6115
6116@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6117@kindex --got=@var{type}
6118The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6119The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6120@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6121the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6122@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6123entries only at non-negative offsets.
6124@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6125entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6126support such GOTs.
6127@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6128output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6129file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6130files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6131
6132@ifclear GENERIC
6133@lowersections
6134@end ifclear
6135@end ifset
6136
36f63dca
NC
6137@ifset MMIX
6138@ifclear GENERIC
6139@raisesections
6140@end ifclear
6141
6142@node MMIX
6143@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6144For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6145@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6146understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6147can translate between the two formats.
6148
6149There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6150Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6151registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6152equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6153@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6154global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6155this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6156symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6157
7a2de473
HPN
6158Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6159@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6160The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6161of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6162
6163Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6164are left out from an mmo file.
6165
6166@ifclear GENERIC
6167@lowersections
6168@end ifclear
6169@end ifset
6170
6171@ifset MSP430
6172@ifclear GENERIC
6173@raisesections
6174@end ifclear
6175
6176@node MSP430
6177@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6178For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6179will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6180just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6181
6182@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6183The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6184
6185@table @code
6186@item @samp{.vectors}
6187Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6188
6189@item @samp{.bootloader}
6190Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6191in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6192
6193@item @samp{.infomem}
6194Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6195this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6196
c0065db7 6197@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6198This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6199in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6200
6201@item @samp{.noinit}
6202Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6203
c0065db7 6204The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6205@end table
6206
6207@ifclear GENERIC
6208@lowersections
6209@end ifclear
6210@end ifset
6211
2a60a7a8
AM
6212@ifset POWERPC
6213@ifclear GENERIC
6214@raisesections
6215@end ifclear
6216
6217@node PowerPC ELF32
6218@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6219@cindex PowerPC long branches
6220@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6221Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6222displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6223@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6224@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6225the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6226section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
6227section exceeds 33M in size.
6228
6229@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6230@table @option
6231@cindex PowerPC PLT
6232@kindex --bss-plt
6233@item --bss-plt
6234Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6235generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6236the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6237writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6238@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6239PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6240compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6241BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6242
016687f8
AM
6243@kindex --secure-plt
6244@item --secure-plt
6245@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6246@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6247when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6248layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6249style BSS PLT.
6250
2a60a7a8
AM
6251@cindex PowerPC GOT
6252@kindex --sdata-got
6253@item --sdata-got
6254The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6255sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6256@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6257section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6258@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6259@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6260@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6261@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6262PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6263pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6264GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6265really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6266
6267@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6268@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6269@item --emit-stub-syms
6270This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6271symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6272
6273@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6274@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6275@item --no-tls-optimize
6276PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6277sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6278disable the optimization.
6279@end table
6280
6281@ifclear GENERIC
6282@lowersections
6283@end ifclear
6284@end ifset
6285
6286@ifset POWERPC64
6287@ifclear GENERIC
6288@raisesections
6289@end ifclear
6290
6291@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6292@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6293
6294@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6295@table @option
6296@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6297@kindex --stub-group-size
6298@item --stub-group-size
6299Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6300by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6301@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6302sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6303a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6304the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6305conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6306prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6307A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6308branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6309@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6310@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6311detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6312positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6313
6314Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6315single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6316create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6317large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6318
6319@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6320@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6321@item --emit-stub-syms
6322This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6323symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6324
6325@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6326@kindex --dotsyms
6327@kindex --no-dotsyms
6328@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6329These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6330in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6331function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6332code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6333properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6334to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6335@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6336dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6337feature.
6338
6339@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6340@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6341@item --no-tls-optimize
6342PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6343sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6344disable the optimization.
6345
6346@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6347@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6348@item --no-opd-optimize
6349PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6350corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6351the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6352Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6353
6354@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6355@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6356@item --non-overlapping-opd
6357Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6358@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6359the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6360entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6361
6362@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6363@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6364@item --no-toc-optimize
6365PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6366entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6367reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6368marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6369marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6370relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6371unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6372reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6373discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6374reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6375code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6376optimization.
6377
6378@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6379@kindex --no-multi-toc
6380@item --no-multi-toc
6381By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6382entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6383total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6384grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6385TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6386calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6387help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
638864K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6389Use this option to turn off this feature.
6390@end table
6391
6392@ifclear GENERIC
6393@lowersections
6394@end ifclear
6395@end ifset
6396
49fa1e15
AM
6397@ifset SPU
6398@ifclear GENERIC
6399@raisesections
6400@end ifclear
6401
6402@node SPU ELF
6403@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6404
6405@cindex SPU ELF options
6406@table @option
6407
6408@cindex SPU plugins
6409@kindex --plugin
6410@item --plugin
6411This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6412
6413@cindex SPU overlays
6414@kindex --no-overlays
6415@item --no-overlays
6416Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6417regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6418@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6419turns off all this special overlay handling.
6420
6421@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6422@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6423@item --emit-stub-syms
6424This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6425symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6426
6427@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6428@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6429@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6430This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6431function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6432on calls to non-overlay regions.
6433
6434@cindex SPU local store size
6435@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6436@item --local-store=lo:hi
6437@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6438the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6439range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6440
c0065db7 6441@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6442@kindex --stack-analysis
6443@item --stack-analysis
6444SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6445unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6446under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6447@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6448@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6449determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6450for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6451for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6452for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6453find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6454and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6455under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6456dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6457is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6458and calls will be given.
6459
c0065db7 6460@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6461@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6462@item --emit-stack-syms
6463This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6464in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6465These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6466functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6467functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6468such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6469The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6470@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6471@end table
6472
6473@ifclear GENERIC
6474@lowersections
6475@end ifclear
6476@end ifset
6477
36f63dca
NC
6478@ifset TICOFF
6479@ifclear GENERIC
6480@raisesections
6481@end ifclear
6482
6483@node TI COFF
6484@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6485@cindex TI COFF versions
6486@kindex --format=@var{version}
6487The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6488TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6489also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6490format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6491header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6492
6493@ifclear GENERIC
6494@lowersections
6495@end ifclear
6496@end ifset
6497
2ca22b03
NC
6498@ifset WIN32
6499@ifclear GENERIC
6500@raisesections
6501@end ifclear
6502
6503@node WIN32
6504@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6505
c0065db7 6506This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6507See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6508command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6509
6510@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6511@cindex import libraries
6512@item import libraries
69da35b5 6513The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6514libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6515regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6516archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6517support for creating such libraries provided with the
6518@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6519
c0065db7
RM
6520@item exporting DLL symbols
6521@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6522The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6523
6524@table @emph
6525@item using auto-export functionality
6526@cindex using auto-export functionality
6527By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6528which is controlled by the following command line options:
6529
0a5d968e
NC
6530@itemize
6531@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6532@item --exclude-symbols
6533@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6534@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6535@end itemize
6536
c0065db7 6537If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6538command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6539if either of the following are true:
6540
6541@itemize
6542@item A DEF file is used.
6543@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6544@end itemize
dc8465bf 6545
c0065db7
RM
6546@item using a DEF file
6547@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6548Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6549an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6550exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6551name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6552command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6553
6554@example
6555gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6556@end example
6557
0a5d968e
NC
6558Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6559@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6560
dc8465bf
NC
6561Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6562
6563@example
4b5bd4e7 6564LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6565
6566EXPORTS
6567foo
6568bar
6569_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6570another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6571var1 DATA
c0065db7 6572@end example
dc8465bf 6573
4b5bd4e7
DS
6574This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6575symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6576alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6577by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6578@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6579@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6580
6b31ad16
DS
6581The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6582name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6583the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6584
b45619c0
NC
6585When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6586library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6587@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6588executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6589
6590With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6591specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6592non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6593
6594If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6595or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6596filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6597
4b5bd4e7
DS
6598The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6599
6600@example
6601EXPORTS
6602 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6603 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6604 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6605@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6606
6607Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6608@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6609@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6610@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6611Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6612@samp{<integer>} alias.
6613
6614The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6615
6616@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6617will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6618by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6619linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6620library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6621
6622@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6623The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6624the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6625@code{*_imp__foo}).
6626
6627@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6628well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6629read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6630variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6631the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6632extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6633application will behave unexpectedly.
6634
6635@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6636it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6637symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6638API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6639the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6640
4b5bd4e7
DS
6641See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6642other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6643
6644@cindex creating a DEF file
6645While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6646with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6647
6648@item Using decorations
6649@cindex Using decorations
6650Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6651itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6652declared as:
6653
6654@example
6655__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6656__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6657@end example
6658
6659All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6660any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6661this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6662the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6663
6664Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6665decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6666instead:
6667
6668@example
6669__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6670__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6671@end example
6672
c0065db7
RM
6673This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6674when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6675variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6676code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6677of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6678omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6679@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6680information.
c0065db7 6681@end table
dc8465bf 6682
2ca22b03
NC
6683@cindex automatic data imports
6684@item automatic data imports
6685The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6686by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6687compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6688issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6689code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6690c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6691initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6692decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6693platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6694command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6695The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6696suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6697trigger the feature's use.
6698
c0065db7 6699auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6700additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6701
c0065db7 6702"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6703documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6704
c0065db7
RM
6705The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6706occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6707One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6708below.
6709
6710@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6711For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6712object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6713offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6714field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6715in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6716without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6717The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6718references.
6719
c0065db7
RM
6720The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6721be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6722themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6723runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6724compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6725support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6726run without error on an older system.
6727
c0065db7
RM
6728@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6729enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6730
6731@cindex direct linking to a dll
6732@item direct linking to a dll
6733The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6734including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6735libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6736traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6737libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6738function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6739though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6740storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6741tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6742large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6743
c0065db7 6744Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6745@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6746of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6747perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6748select the dll instead of an import library.
6749
2ca22b03 6750
69da35b5
NC
6751For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6752to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6753
6754@example
45e948fe
NC
6755libxxx.dll.a
6756xxx.dll.a
6757libxxx.a
6758xxx.lib
69da35b5 6759cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6760libxxx.dll
6761xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6762@end example
6763
69da35b5
NC
6764before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6765
c0065db7
RM
6766(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6767where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6768@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6769file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6770@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6771
c0065db7
RM
6772Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6773@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6774was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6775various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6776could coexist on the same machine.
6777
2ca22b03
NC
6778The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6779applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6780libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6781
6782@example
6783bin/
6784 cygxxx.dll
6785lib/
6786 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6787 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6788@end example
6789
c0065db7
RM
6790Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6791done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6792
67931. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6794@example
6795gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6796@end example
2ca22b03 6797
69da35b5
NC
6798However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6799(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6800@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6801not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6802
2ca22b03
NC
68032. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6804directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6805should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6806making the app/dll.
6807
6808@example
6809ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6810@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6811
6812Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6813
6814@example
6815gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6816@end example
69da35b5
NC
6817
6818This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6819perfectly legal
6820
6821@example
6822bin/
6823 cygxxx-5.dll
6824lib/
c0065db7 6825 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6826@end example
6827
dc8465bf 6828Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6829even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6830@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6831
6832Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6833wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6834
68351. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6836work with auto-imported data.
6837
dc8465bf
NC
68382. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6839import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6840symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6841for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6842possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6843
45e948fe
NC
68443. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6845critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6846in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6847stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6848
69da35b5 6849So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6850true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6851a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6852binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6853massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6854requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6855will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6856
c0065db7 6857@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6858@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6859@item adding additional names
6860Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6861A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6862exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6863when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6864import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6865
c0065db7 6866@example
dc8465bf
NC
6867LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6868
6869EXPORTS
c0065db7 6870foo
dc8465bf 6871_foo = foo
c0065db7 6872@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6873
6874The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6875
6876Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6877source code using the "weak" attribute:
6878
c0065db7
RM
6879@example
6880void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6881void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6882@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6883
6884See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6885symbols.
6886
6887@item renaming symbols
6888Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6889kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6890@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6891DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6892created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6893
c0065db7 6894@example
dc8465bf
NC
6895LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6896
6897EXPORTS
6898_foo = foo
c0065db7 6899@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6900
6901The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6902@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6903@end table
dc8465bf 6904
0a5d968e 6905Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6906unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6907If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6908@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6909that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6910@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6911renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6912to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6913the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6914In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6915which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6916
6917@cindex weak externals
6918@item weak externals
6919The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6920weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6921defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6922are three variants of weak externals:
6923@itemize
6924@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6925called lazy externals.
6926@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6927This form is not presently implemented.
6928@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6929implemented.
6930@end itemize
6931As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6932are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6933uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6934@end table
6935
6936@ifclear GENERIC
6937@lowersections
6938@end ifclear
6939@end ifset
6940
e0001a05
NC
6941@ifset XTENSA
6942@ifclear GENERIC
6943@raisesections
6944@end ifclear
6945
6946@node Xtensa
6947@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6948
6949@cindex Xtensa processors
6950The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6951@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6952specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6953keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6954example, with the command:
6955
6956@smallexample
6957SECTIONS
6958@{
6959 .text : @{
6960 *(.literal .text)
6961 @}
6962@}
6963@end smallexample
6964
6965@noindent
6966@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6967and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6968literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6969interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6970group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6971files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6972and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6973
43cd72b9 6974@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6975@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6976Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6977provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6978is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6979literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6980will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6981location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6982the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6983unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6984@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6985range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6986
6987For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6988to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6989instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6990instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6991instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6992@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6993hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6994By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6995switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6996density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6997instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6998performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6999linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7000a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7001
7002The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7003control the linker:
7004
7005@cindex Xtensa options
7006@table @option
e0001a05 7007@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
7008@item --no-relax
7009Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
7010by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
7011relaxation.
7012
7013@item --size-opt
7014When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7015more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7016no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7017alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7018preserve the correctness of the code.
7019@end table
e0001a05
NC
7020
7021@ifclear GENERIC
7022@lowersections
7023@end ifclear
7024@end ifset
7025
252b5132
RH
7026@ifclear SingleFormat
7027@node BFD
7028@chapter BFD
7029
7030@cindex back end
7031@cindex object file management
7032@cindex object formats available
7033@kindex objdump -i
7034The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7035These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7036object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7037format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7038it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7039associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7040object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7041(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7042list all the formats available for your configuration.
7043
7044@cindex BFD requirements
7045@cindex requirements for BFD
7046As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7047several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7048BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7049formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7050been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7051BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7052may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7053
7054One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7055mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7056useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7057conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7058
7059@menu
7060* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7061@end menu
7062
7063@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7064@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7065@cindex opening object files
7066@include bfdsumm.texi
7067@end ifclear
7068
7069@node Reporting Bugs
7070@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7071@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7072@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7073
ff5dcc92 7074Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7075
7076Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7077it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7078to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7079work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7080@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7081
7082In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7083information that enables us to fix the bug.
7084
7085@menu
7086* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7087* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7088@end menu
7089
7090@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7091@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7092@cindex bug criteria
7093
7094If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7095
7096@itemize @bullet
7097@cindex fatal signal
7098@cindex linker crash
7099@cindex crash of linker
7100@item
7101If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7102@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7103
7104@cindex error on valid input
7105@item
ff5dcc92 7106If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7107
7108@cindex invalid input
7109@item
ff5dcc92 7110If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7111may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7112object files are correct.
7113
7114@item
7115If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7116improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7117@end itemize
7118
7119@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7120@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7121@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7122@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7123
7124A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7125products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7126recommend you contact that organization first.
7127
7128You can find contact information for many support companies and
7129individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7130distribution.
7131
ad22bfe8 7132@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7133Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7134@value{BUGURL}.
7135@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7136
7137The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7138@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7139fact or leave it out, state it!
7140
7141Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7142problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7143assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7144matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7145the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7146location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7147were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7148into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7149specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7150and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7151
7152Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7153the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7154on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7155
7156Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7157bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7158respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7159You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7160
7161To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7162
7163@itemize @bullet
7164@item
ff5dcc92 7165The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7166the @samp{--version} argument.
7167
7168Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7169the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7170
7171@item
ff5dcc92 7172Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7173patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7174
7175@item
7176The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7177version number.
7178
7179@item
ff5dcc92 7180What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7181``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7182
7183@item
7184The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7185observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7186list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7187sufficient.
7188
7189If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7190and then we might not encounter the bug.
7191
7192@item
7193A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7194bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7195provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7196bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7197state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7198requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7199we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7200attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7201
7202If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7203@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7204object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7205@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7206how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7207
7208@item
7209A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7210incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7211
ff5dcc92 7212Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7213will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7214not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7215a chance to make a mistake.
7216
7217Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7218say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7219copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7220C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7221and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7222fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7223you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7224any conclusion from our observations.
7225
7226@item
ff5dcc92 7227If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7228diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7229@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7230If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7231context, not by line number.
7232
7233The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7234sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7235@end itemize
7236
7237Here are some things that are not necessary:
7238
7239@itemize @bullet
7240@item
7241A description of the envelope of the bug.
7242
7243Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7244which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7245changes will not affect it.
7246
7247This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7248will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7249with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7250We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7251
7252Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7253of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7254output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7255less time, and so on.
7256
7257However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7258report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7259
7260@item
7261A patch for the bug.
7262
7263A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7264the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7265a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7266to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7267
ff5dcc92 7268Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7269construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7270through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7271able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7272fixed.
7273
7274And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7275patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7276help us to understand.
7277
7278@item
7279A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7280
7281Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7282things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7283@end itemize
7284
7285@node MRI
7286@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7287@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7288To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7289linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7290alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7291described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7292simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7293@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7294linker commands; these commands are described here.
7295
7296In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7297file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7298features to make use of them.
7299
7300You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7301@samp{-c} command-line option.
7302
7303Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7304command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7305blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7306MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7307issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7308
7309Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7310
7311You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7312lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7313The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7314
7315@table @code
7316@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7317@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7318@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7319Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7320the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7321@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7322your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7323script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7324commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7325input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7326@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7327
7328@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7329@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7330Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7331in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7332
7333@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7334
7335@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7336@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7337Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7338@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7339
7340@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7341@item BASE @var{expression}
7342Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7343absolute addresses) in the output file.
7344
7345@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7346@item CHIP @var{expression}
7347@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7348This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7349
7350@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7351@item END
7352This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7353
7354@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7355@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7356Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7357language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7358
7359@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7360@item
252b5132
RH
7361S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7362
7363@item
7364IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7365
7366@item
7367COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7368@samp{COFF}
7369@end enumerate
7370
7371@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7372@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7373Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7374@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7375
7376The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7377same line, with no change in its effect.
7378
7379@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7380@item LOAD @var{filename}
7381@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7382Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7383same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7384command line.
7385
7386@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7387@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7388@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7389MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7390option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7391
7392@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7393@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7394@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7395Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7396order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7397script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7398sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7399file, in the order specified.
7400
7401@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7402@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7403@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7404@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7405Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7406@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7407
7408@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7409@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7410@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7411@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7412You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7413specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7414If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7415@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7416@end table
7417
793c5807
NC
7418@node GNU Free Documentation License
7419@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7420@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7421
370b66a1
CD
7422@node LD Index
7423@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7424
7425@printindex cp
7426
7427@tex
7428% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7429% meantime:
7430\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7431\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7432\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7433\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7434\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7435\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7436\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7437\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7438\page\colophon
7439% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7440@end tex
7441
252b5132 7442@bye
This page took 0.84844 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.